JP2007209402A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To achieve a shortened variation of the variable display corresponding to start memory counts at a background pattern display part. <P>SOLUTION: A variable display device 9 comprises the first variable display 9a for variably displaying the first decoration figures, the second variable display part 9b for variably display the second decoration figures and a background pattern display part 9c which enables players to visually recognize the display content easily. When the first or second starting requirements are established, if the value of total reservation memory counts exceeds a prescribed value (for example, 4), the first special figure and the first decoration figure or the second special figure and the second decoration figure undergo the shortened variation (variation time of 5 sec). In this case, the background figures undergoes the shortened variation (variation time of 5 sec) synchronizing the first special figure and the first decoration figure or the second special figure and the second decoration figure. When the decision is made to the effect that the prescribed requirements for shift are not established, the special game status is ended by setting the status data to the non-special state data. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2007,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention starts the variable display of the first identification information based on the satisfaction of the first start condition of the variable display after the first execution condition of the variable display is satisfied, and the first variable for deriving and displaying the display result. The second variable for starting the variable display of the second identification information based on the satisfaction of the second start condition for the variable display after the display unit and the second execution condition for the variable display are satisfied, and deriving and displaying the display result The present invention relates to a gaming machine that includes a display unit and shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived and displayed on either the first variable display unit or the second variable display unit.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a plurality of variable display portions capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “variation”) are provided, and a game is displayed when the display result of the variable information identification display is a specific display result in any of the variable display portions. Some are configured to be controllable to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player.

  The specific game state means a state advantageous to a player who is given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the specific gaming state is, for example, a state in which a special variable winning device is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a ball (a big hit gaming state), or a state in which a right to become advantageous for a player has occurred. In this state, a predetermined game value such as a state where conditions for paying out premium game media are easily established is given.

  In such a gaming machine, the fact that the display result in the variable display unit that displays the special symbol as identification information becomes a combination of specific display modes (specific display result) that is determined in advance is called “big hit”. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state in which a hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). Note that an opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Further, when a predetermined condition (for example, winning in a V zone provided in the big prize opening) is not established at the time when the big prize opening is closed, the big hit gaming state is configured to end. Sometimes.

  Further, such a gaming machine includes one variable display unit and a start memory display LED that displays a start memory number that is the number of conditions for executing variable display, and the start memory number is a predetermined number (for example, 3 ) In the above case, there is one that shortens the variable display change time compared to when the number of starting memories is smaller than a predetermined number (for example, 2 or less) (for example, see Patent Document 1). In such a gaming machine, for example, by setting the variable display fluctuation time at the time of probability change to be longer than the normal time when the starting memory number is a predetermined number or more, the maximum display result derivation number per time to the variable display unit is set. It is directly suppressed.

  Further, such a gaming machine is provided with two variable display units and one notification symbol display unit (hereinafter referred to as a background symbol display unit), which is executed by any one of the variable display units in the background symbol display unit. Some of them are provided with a start memory display for notifying the player of the progress of the variable display being performed, and subtracting and displaying the start memory number for each variation time (see, for example, Patent Document 2). In such a gaming machine, in the background symbol display unit, variable display of a notification symbol (hereinafter referred to as background symbol) corresponding to the variable display executed in any of the variable display units is executed, and the background symbol is variable. By the display effect, the player is notified of the progress of the variable display being executed by the variable display unit. In addition, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 2 is provided with a total number of established number display means for displaying the total number of established conditions that is the total number of established conditions for execution of variable display of each variable display unit. The total number established is displayed so as to be relatively conspicuous in the gaming machine.

JP-A-10-108952 (paragraphs 0038 and 0041) Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-185353 (paragraph 0121-0124, FIG. 3)

  In a gaming machine provided with two variable display units and one background symbol display unit, in order to suppress the maximum number of display result derivation times per time to the variable display unit, It is conceivable to combine the variable display variation time reduction methods described in Patent Document 1. However, even if the variation time reduction method described in Patent Document 1 is applied to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 2 as it is, the starting memory number (total number of establishments) for the background symbol display unit is a predetermined value (for example, 4), when the variable variation in one variable display portion is shortened, the shortening variation is not performed when the other variable display portion is variable. For example, when the number of starting memories for the first variable display section is four and the number of starting memories for the second variable display section is two, the number of starting memories for the background symbol display section exceeds 4. Regardless, the shortening variation is performed at the time of the variable variation in the first variable display unit, but the shortening variation is not performed at the time of the variable variation in the second variable display unit, and the player may feel suspicious. There is.

  Therefore, the present invention provides a gaming machine configured to variably display identification information on a plurality of variable display units, and to notify the progress of variable display on one of the variable display units with one background symbol display unit. It is an object of the present invention to enable variable display shortening variation corresponding to the number of starting memories in the background symbol display section.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has a variable display first start condition (for example, a first special symbol) after a variable display first execution condition (for example, a winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening 13) is established. And after the final stop of the first decorative symbol, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol) is started based on the establishment of the first reserved memory number is not 0) The first variable display unit (for example, the first special symbol display 8a or the first variable display unit 9a) for deriving and displaying the display result, and the second execution condition for the variable display (for example, the second start winning opening) The second start condition of variable display after the winning of the game ball to 14) is established (for example, after the second stop of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol, the second reserved memory number is not 0) Second identification information (for example, the second special symbol and the A second variable display unit (for example, a second special symbol display unit 8b or a second variable display unit 9b) that starts variable display of the second decorative symbol) and derives and displays the display result; When a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on either the display unit or the second variable display unit, a transition is made to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, When the transition condition is satisfied (for example, when the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed on one of the variable display portions 9a and 9b, or regardless of the type of symbol derived and displayed on the variable display portions 9a and 9b) If the result of the internal lottery is to be a probable big hit or the like, or if a re-draw lottery effect of the gaming state is executed at a predetermined timing, a specific character appears in the effect, or in the battle If you win And a special gaming state in which the display result of the variable display of identification information is likely to be a specific display result (for example, a probable change state or a short time state) compared to a normal game state different from the specific game state. And a third variable display section (for example, a background symbol display section 9c) that makes it easier to visually recognize display contents than the first variable display section and the second variable display section, and the gaming state is a special gaming state. State data (for example, the state data shown in FIG. 43) indicating whether or not the game is in a special state data indicating that a special gaming state is in effect when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and a predetermined end condition State data set to non-special state data indicating that the game is not in a special gaming state when it is established (for example, it is determined that the probability variation state is to be ended by lottery or the predetermined number of short-time executions is ended) Data setting means (for example, a part for executing steps S454, S458, S460, S206, S209, S211, and S63 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the first variable display section based on the establishment of the first start condition. When starting the variable display of the first identification information, whether the display result of the variable display of the first identification information is a specific display result, and whether a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, in the case of a big hit A first pre-determining means (for example, a game) for determining whether or not to make a probable big hit (or a short time big hit or a probable time short big hit), that is, whether to make a big hit symbol a probable variable symbol (or a short time symbol or a probable time short symbol) A portion for executing the processing of steps S64, S65, and S66 in the control microcomputer 560) and the second start condition When variable display of the second identification information of the second variable display unit based on the establishment is started, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second identification information is a specific display result, and a predetermined transition condition is established Second pre-determining means for determining whether or not (for example, a part for executing the same process as the process of steps S64, S65, and S66 in the second special symbol process in the game control microcomputer 560), the first A first variable display time determining means for determining a variable display time of the first identification information of the variable display unit (for example, a part that executes the process of step S212 in the first variation pattern setting process in the game control microcomputer 560); Second variable display time determining means for determining the variable display time of the second identification information of the second variable display section (for example, the game control microcomputer 56 In the second variation pattern setting process, a process corresponding to the process of step S212) and the determination result of the first predetermining means are displayed on the first variable display section. First variable display execution means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) that executes and displays a display result on the first variable display section when the variable display time determined by the first variable display time determination means elapses. In step S214 to S215, steps S121 to S126, the first off symbol stop process and the first big hit symbol stop process are executed. In the production control microcomputer 100, steps S843, S844 and S1821 to S1833 are executed. And a part for executing the first decorative symbol stop process), and the determination result of the second pre-determining means Based on the above, the variable display of the second identification information is executed by the second variable display unit, and the display result is displayed on the second variable display unit when the variable display time determined by the second variable display time determining unit has elapsed. Second variable display execution means for deriving and displaying (for example, the processing of steps S214 to S215 and steps S121 to S126 in the second special symbol process in the game control microcomputer 560, the first off symbol stop processing and the first big hit The part that executes the same process as the symbol stop process, in the production control microcomputer 100, executes the processes in steps S843, S844, S1821 to S1833 in the second decorative symbol process and the same process as the first decorative symbol stop process. And a variable display of the first identification information on the first variable display unit by the first variable display executing means. Corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information, when the variable display of the second identification information is being executed on the second variable display unit by the second variable display execution means The third identification information (for example, background symbol) is variably displayed, and when the predetermined variable display time has elapsed, the effect result corresponding to the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed as the third. Third variable display execution means for derivation and display on the variable display section (for example, the part for executing the processing of steps S902 to S905 in the production control microcomputer 100), the number of established first execution conditions and the second execution Total establishment number display means for displaying the total establishment number (for example, the total number of pending storages) that is the sum of the number of established conditions in an identifiable manner (for example, in the production control microcomputer 100) And the total number-of-established number updating means for subtracting and updating the display that can identify the total number of established times when the third variable display executing means executes variable display of the third identification information. (For example, the part that executes the processing of step S916 in the production control microcomputer 100) and the total number-of-established number determination means that determines whether or not the total number of established values is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 4) (for example, a game And the third variable display executing means, when the total establishment number determination means determines that the total establishment number is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, the third variable display execution means An effect result corresponding to the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information after starting the variable display of the identification information is derived to the third variable display unit. The variable display time until display is shorter than when the total establishment number is determined to be less than the predetermined value by the total establishment number determination means (for example, the background symbol variation pattern No. 1, No. 1 No. 10 (variation time 10 seconds) background symbol variation pattern No. 9 (variable time 5 seconds) is selected) variable display time shortening means (for example, a part for executing the processing of step S920b in the gaming control microcomputer 100), the state data setting means is shifted to the special gaming state. When the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information based on the variable display time determined by the first variable display time determination means or the second variable display time determination means is started (for example, step) Y in S208), it is determined whether or not a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, steps S59, S61, S206), and it is determined that the special gaming state is ended when it is determined that the predetermined end condition is satisfied. The state data is set to non-special state data (for example, steps S206, S209, S60, S63).

  The gaming machine includes a game control microcomputer that controls the progress of the game and an effect control microcomputer that controls the display state of the third variable display unit, and the first predetermining means shifts to the specific game state. Whether to execute a post-transition notification effect (for example, a re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit game) for notifying whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied at a later predetermined timing (for example, during the round or after the end of the big hit game) Before the derivation display of the display result (for example, the part for executing step S1105 in the gaming control microcomputer 560), the second pre-determining means is a predetermined timing (for example, the transition to the specific gaming state (for example, Post-transition notification effect (for example, re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit game) that informs whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the round or after the big hit game ends) Whether or not to execute is determined before the derivation display of the display result (for example, the part that executes the same process as step S1105 in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process in the game control microcomputer 560), and the game control micro Based on the determination result by the first pre-deciding means or the second pre-deciding means, the computer displays a variable display time (for example, from the start of the variable display of the identification information in the plurality of variable display sections until the display result is derived and displayed) Variable display data selection means (for example, step S212 in the game control microcomputer 560) that selects variable display data (for example, a variation pattern) that can specify the variation time from a plurality of types of variable display data that have been determined in advance. And a variable table selected by the variable display data selection means Variable display command transmission means for transmitting a variable display command (for example, a variation pattern command) indicating data (for example, a part for executing step S213 in the game control microcomputer 560: a process for setting the variation pattern command in step S213) In the effect control command control process (step S28) (hereinafter, the same applies to other commands), and the first predetermining means or the second predetermining means. Display result command (for example, a symbol / effect designation command) indicating whether or not to make a specific display result, whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and whether or not a post-transition notification effect is executed. : Refer to FIG. 28) Display result command transmission means (for example, play) Steps S1104, S1108, S1109, S1114, S1115, S1120, S1121, S1127, and S1128 in the technique control microcomputer 560) and after the transition at the predetermined timing after the transition to the specific gaming state Including a notification effect start command transmission means (for example, a part for executing S443 in the game control microcomputer 560) for transmitting a notification effect start command (for example, an ending command) indicating the start of the notification effect. Based on the variable display command, the microcomputer executes a pre-transition notification effect (for example, a re-lottery effect before the start of the big hit game) for notifying whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied before the start of the specific game state. Multiple types of variable tables including variable display modes Variable display mode selection means for selecting a variable display mode to be executed from among the modes (for example, a portion for executing steps S832, S920b, S922, S923, S959, S968, S982, and S983 in the production control microcomputer 100) , A post-transition notification effect executing means for executing the post-transition notification effect on the third variable display unit based on the notification effect start command (for example, a part for executing steps S971 to S976 in the effect control microcomputer 100), and variable When the variable display mode for executing the notification effect before transition is selected by the display mode selection means and the display result command from the display result command transmission means indicates the execution of the notification effect after transition, the notification effect before transition Do not notify that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied Notification prohibition control means (for example, in step S1862 in the production control microcomputer 100, the occurrence of a predetermined big hit is recognized by the predetermined big hit effect flag and the re-lottery effect is executed after the big hit game is finished). When the lottery execution flag is recognized, in step S1863, the symbol indicating the occurrence of the predetermined jackpot recognized by the predetermined jackpot effect flag (for example, the probability variable symbol indicating the occurrence of the probability variable jackpot if the probability variable jackpot effect flag is set). ) Is controlled so as not to be determined as a jackpot display symbol), and the third variable display execution means is configured to perform the second variable display section in the third variable display section based on the variable display mode selected by the variable display mode selection unit. 3 Variable display of identification information is executed (for example, production control microcomputer 1 (Steps S901 to S905 in 00 are executed).

  The gaming machine includes a game control microcomputer that controls the progress of the game and an effect control microcomputer that controls the display state of the third variable display unit, and the first predetermining means shifts to the specific game state. A post-transition notification effect (for example, a re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit game) is executed to notify whether a predetermined transition condition is satisfied at a later predetermined timing (for example, during the round or after the end of the big hit game). Before the derivation display of the display result (for example, the part of step S1105 in the game control microcomputer 560), the second pre-determining means is a predetermined timing (for example, after the transition to the specific gaming state) In the round, or after the end of the jackpot game, a post-transition notification effect that notifies whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, a re-lottery performance after the end of the jackpot game) ) Is determined before the display result is derived and displayed (for example, the part of the second special symbol stop symbol setting process in the game control microcomputer 560 that performs the same process as step S1105), and the game control The microcomputer for the variable display time from the start of the variable display of the identification information in the plurality of variable display units to the derivation and display of the display result based on the determination result by the first predetermination unit or the second predetermination unit The variable display data (for example, the fluctuation pattern: see FIG. 87) that can specify whether (for example, the fluctuation time) and the notification effect after the transition are to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of variable display data determined in advance. Variable display data selection means (for example, a part for executing step S212 in the game control microcomputer 560); Variable display command transmission means for transmitting variable display command (for example, variation pattern command) indicating the variable display data selected by the variable display data selection means (for example, a part for executing step S213 in the game control microcomputer 560: In step S213, the process of setting the variation pattern command is performed, and the process of actually transmitting the command is performed in the effect control command control process (step S28) (hereinafter, the same applies to other commands). A display result command (for example, a symbol / effect designating command) indicating whether or not a specific display result is set and whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied based on the determination result by the first pre-deciding means or the second pre-deciding means. : Refer to FIG. 87) Display result command transmission means for transmitting (For example, the part for executing steps S1104, S1108, S1114, S1120, and S1127 in the gaming control microcomputer 560) and the execution of the post-transition notification effect at the predetermined timing after the transition to the specific gaming state. Including a notification effect start command transmission means (for example, a part for executing S443 in the game control microcomputer 560) for transmitting a notification effect start command (for example, an ending command) indicating the start, and the effect control microcomputer is variable. A variable display mode for executing a pre-transition notification effect (for example, a re-lottery effect before the start of a big hit game) for notifying whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied before the start of the specific game state based on the display command. Variable display mode to be executed from a plurality of types of variable display modes A variable display mode selection means to be selected (for example, a part for executing steps S832, S920b, S922, S923, S959, S968, S982, and S983 in the production control microcomputer 100) and a post-transition notification based on a notification production start command The post-transition notification effect executing means for executing the effect in the third variable display section (for example, the portion executing steps S971 to S976 in the effect control microcomputer 100) and the variable display mode selection means execute the pre-transition notification effect. When the variable display mode to be selected is selected and the variable display command from the variable display command transmission means indicates the execution of the post-transition notification effect, notification that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the pre-transition notification effect Notification prohibition control means (e.g. In step S1862 in the production control microcomputer 100, if the occurrence of a predetermined big hit is recognized by the predetermined big hit effect flag and the re-lottery execution flag is recognized to be executed after the big hit game is finished, the step In S1863, the symbol indicating the occurrence of the predetermined jackpot recognized by the predetermined jackpot effect flag (for example, the probability variation symbol indicating the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot when the probability variation jackpot effect flag is set) is not determined as the jackpot display symbol. The third variable display execution means executes variable display of the third identification information in the third variable display section based on the variable display mode selected by the variable display mode selection means (for example, a control part) Steps S901 to S905 in the production control microcomputer 100 It is also possible to configure such that

  The gaming machine includes a game control microcomputer that controls the progress of the game and an effect control microcomputer that controls the display state of the third variable display unit, and the first predetermining means shifts to the specific game state. A post-transition notification effect (for example, a re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit game) is executed to notify whether a predetermined transition condition is satisfied at a later predetermined timing (for example, during the round or after the end of the big hit game). Before the derivation display of the display result (for example, the part of step S1105 in the game control microcomputer 560), the second pre-determining means is a predetermined timing (for example, after the transition to the specific gaming state) In the round, or after the end of the jackpot game, a post-transition notification effect that notifies whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, a re-lottery performance after the end of the jackpot game) ) Is determined before the display result is derived and displayed (for example, step S1105 is executed in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process in the game control microcomputer 560), and the game control microcomputer Based on the determination result by the first predetermining means or the second predetermining means, variable display time (for example, fluctuation) from the start of variable display of the identification information on the plurality of variable display sections to the display of the display result Variable display data selection for selecting variable display data (for example, fluctuation pattern: see FIG. 92) from a plurality of predetermined variable display data that can specify whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Means (for example, part of step S212 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the variable table Variable display command transmission means for transmitting variable display command (for example, variation pattern command) indicating the variable display data selected by the data selection means (for example, the part for executing step S213 in the game control microcomputer 560: step In S213, a process for setting a variation pattern command is performed, and in the effect control command control process (step S28), a process for actually transmitting the command is performed (the same applies to other commands hereinafter). Based on the determination result by the prior determination means or the second prior determination means, whether or not to obtain a specific display result, and a display result command indicating that a post-transition notification effect is executed (for example, a symbol / effect designation command: see FIG. 92) Display result command transmission means (for example, play) Steps S1104, S1108A, S1109A, S1114A, S1120A, S1121A, S1127A, and S1128A in the technique control microcomputer 560) and after the transition at the predetermined timing after the transition to the specific gaming state Including a notification effect start command transmission means (for example, a part for executing S443 in the game control microcomputer 560) for transmitting a notification effect start command (for example, an ending command) indicating the start of the notification effect. Based on the variable display command, the microcomputer executes a pre-transition notification effect (for example, a re-lottery effect before the start of the big hit game) for notifying whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied before the start of the specific game state. Including variable display mode Variable display mode selection means for selecting the variable display mode to be executed from among several types of variable display modes (for example, steps S832, S920b, S922, S923, S959, S968, S982, and S983 in the production control microcomputer 100 are executed. And a post-transition notification effect executing means for executing the post-transition notification effect in the third variable display unit based on the notification effect start command (for example, a portion for executing steps S971 to S976 in the effect control microcomputer 100) And a notification prohibition control means for controlling not to notify that a predetermined transition condition is established in the notification effect before transition when the variable display mode for executing the notification effect before transition is selected by the variable display mode selection means. (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 In step S1862, when it is recognized by the re-lottery execution flag that the occurrence of the predetermined lottery effect is recognized by the predetermined big-hit effect flag and the re-lottery effect is executed after the big-hit game is completed, the predetermined big hit effect is determined in step S1863. A symbol indicating the occurrence of a predetermined jackpot recognized by the effect flag (for example, a portion for controlling the probability variation symbol indicating the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot when the probability variation jackpot effect flag is set) not to be determined as the jackpot display symbol) And the third variable display execution means executes variable display of the third identification information in the third variable display section based on the variable display mode selected by the variable display mode selection means (for example, the effect control micro The part that executes steps S901 to S905 in the computer 100) Also good.

  The notification effect start command transmission means transmits the notification effect start command after the specific gaming state is completed (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a process for opening the first prize opening or the second process for opening the first prize winning opening or the second process). In step S443 in the big prize opening opening process), an ending command designating whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect may be transmitted).

  When it is determined by the first pre-deciding means or the second pre-deciding means that the game control microcomputer does not execute the post-transition notification effect (for example, N in step S1107, N in S1113, N in S1119, or step S1126). N), a specific game state end effect (for example, a re-lottery effect is not executed) indicating an end of a specific game state different from a notification effect start command (for example, an ending command for specifying an ending effect for executing a re-lottery effect) A specific game state end command transmission means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560) that transmits a specific game state end command (for example, an ending command that specifies an ending effect that does not execute the re-lottery effect) indicating execution of the ending effect) In step S443, the re-lottery effect is The ending command for designating the ending effect not to be transmitted), and the effect control microcomputer executes the specific gaming state end effect on the third variable display unit based on the specific gaming state end command. It may be configured so as to include effect execution means (for example, a part for executing steps S971 to S976 in the effect control microcomputer 100).

  The execution time of the specific game state end effect executed by the specific game state end effect executing means is shorter than the execution time of the post-transfer notification effect executed by the post-transfer notification effect executing means (for example, executing the re-lottery effect). The execution time of the ending effect at that time is 15 seconds, and the execution time of the ending effect when the re-lottery effect is not executed is 6 seconds.

  The first pre-determining means is based on the fact that the second pre-determining means has decided that the display result of the variable display of the second identification information is the specific display result, and the second pre-determining means is the variable of the second identification information. The display result of the variable display of the first identification information is used as the specific display result after the determination that the display result of the display is the specific display result until the display result is derived and displayed by the second variable display execution means. (For example, the portion of the game control microcomputer 560 that executes the processing of steps S63 and S63a), the gaming machine prohibits the establishment of the first start condition in the specific gaming state ( For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may further include a portion that executes the process of step S314.

  The gaming machine includes a pattern table storage unit (for example, ROM 54) that stores a variable display pattern table (for example, a variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 9 and 10) in which a variable display pattern of a plurality of types of identification information is shown, and a pattern Based on the variable display pattern table stored in the table storage means, the first variable display pattern determination means for determining the variable display pattern of the first identification information (for example, in steps S202a, S202b and S212 in the game control microcomputer 560). And a second variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer) for determining a variable display pattern of the second identification information based on the variable display pattern table stored in the pattern table storage means. The second variation pattern at 560 The pattern table storage means includes the first identification information of the variable display pattern table in the specific period by the first pre-determining means in the variable display pattern table in steps S202a, S202b, and S212. A specific period pattern table for determining the variable display pattern by the first variable display pattern determining means when the display result of the variable display is determined not to be the specific display result (for example, forcible deviation shown in FIG. 10) And the first variable display pattern determination means is determined not to change the display result of the variable display of the first identification information to the specific display result during the specific period by the first prior determination means. A variable display pattern of the first identification information based on the specific period pattern table stored in the pattern table storage means (For example, in the game control microcomputer 560, when it is determined Yes in step S201, the forced variation pattern table is selected in step S202b, and the variation pattern is determined in step S212), the first variable The display execution means executes variable display of the first identification information according to the variable display pattern determined by the first variable display pattern determination means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560, steps S214, 215, S121 to S126). It may be configured such that a part for executing processing).

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, there is provided a total number-of-establishment determination unit that determines whether or not the total number of formations is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. If it is determined that the value is greater than or equal to the value, after the variable display of the third identification information is started, an effect result corresponding to the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed on the third variable display unit. Since the variable display time until the derivation display is shortened, one of the first variable display unit and the second variable display unit is used even though the total number of establishments is not less than a predetermined value. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the shortening variation is not performed during the variable display, but the shortening variation is not performed during the other variable display. Therefore, the variable display can be shortened and changed in accordance with the number of start memories stored in the third variable display section. Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the special gaming state, when the predetermined transition condition is determined not to be satisfied by the predetermining means at the start of variable display of the identification information in the third variable display unit Is configured to end the special gaming state by setting the state data indicating whether or not the special gaming state is in the non-special state data at the start of the variable display of the identification information. The end of the state can be immediately reflected in the game control in the third variable display section, and as a result, a fair gaming machine can be provided.

  In the invention according to claim 2, in the effect control microcomputer, based on a variable display command from the game control microcomputer, a transition for notifying whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied before the start of the specific game state A variable display mode to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of variable display modes including a variable display mode for executing a previous notification effect, and variable display of identification information is performed in the third variable display unit based on the selected variable display mode. Since it is configured to execute the post-transition notification effect on the variable display device at a predetermined timing after the transition to the specific game state based on the notification effect start command from the game control microcomputer, the specific display result After the message is displayed, the player does not know when the notification effect will be executed, and the notification effect may be performed multiple times (example In order jackpot before the start of the game and the jackpot gaming after the end) there is a possibility of being executed, it is possible to maintain the expectation for the transition to probability variation state of the player for a long period of time. Further, in the production control microcomputer, when it is decided to execute the notification effect before transition, and the display result command specifies execution of the notification effect after transition, the predetermined transition in the notification effect before transition is performed. Since the control is performed so as not to notify that the condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent an unnatural situation in which the notification effect after the transition is executed even if the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. it can.

  In the third aspect of the invention, similarly to the second aspect of the invention, after the specific display result is displayed, the player does not know when the notification effect is executed, and the notification effect is executed a plurality of times. Since there is a possibility, the player's sense of expectation for the transition to the probability change state can be maintained for a long period of time. Further, it is possible to prevent an unnatural situation in which the post-transition notification effect is executed even if the predetermined transition condition is satisfied.

  In the invention described in claim 4, as in the inventions described in claim 2 and claim 3, after the specific display result is displayed, the player does not know when the notification effect is executed, and there are a plurality of notification effects. Since it may be executed twice, the player's expectation for the transition to the probable state can be maintained for a long period of time. Further, it is possible to prevent an unnatural situation in which the post-transition notification effect is executed even if the predetermined transition condition is satisfied.

  According to the fifth aspect of the present invention, the game control microcomputer transmits the notification effect start command after the specific game state is completed, so that the variable display of the next identification information is started even after the specific game state is ended. Since there is a possibility that the notification effect is executed, the expectation for the transition to the probability change state can be maintained for a longer period of time.

  In the invention according to claim 6, the specific game indicating the end of the specific game state different from the notification effect start command when the game control microcomputer determines by the pre-decision means not to execute the notification effect after the transition. The specific game state end command indicating execution of the state end effect is transmitted, and the effect control microcomputer is configured to execute the specific game state end effect on the variable display device based on the specific game state end command. Then, the player can easily recognize that the notification effect is not performed after the transition, and the player can easily grasp the gaming state after the specific gaming state.

  In the seventh aspect of the invention, the execution time of the specific gaming state end effect is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the post-transition notification effect, so the notification effect is not executed in the specific game state end effect. When there is no possibility of transition to a state, it can be avoided that the presentation is unnecessarily executed for a long time.

  In the invention according to claim 8, the first pre-determining means determines that the second pre-determining means determines that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, and the second variable display executing means is the second variable display. When the variable display of the identification information is being executed by the unit, the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the first variable display unit is determined not to be the specific display result. It is possible to prevent the specific display result from being derived and displayed on the variable display unit and the specific display result from being derived and displayed on the second variable display unit, and display that is not the specific display result. It can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the result is derived and displayed on the variable display section. In addition, since it is configured to further include prohibition means for prohibiting the establishment of the first start condition in the specific game state, the specific game is based on the specific display result being derived and displayed on the second variable display section. When the state is shifted, the specific display result can be prevented from being derived and displayed on the first variable display unit. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the specific display result from being derived and displayed on the first variable display section and the specific display result from being derived and displayed on the second variable display section at the same time.

  The invention according to claim 9 includes a specific period pattern table which is a dedicated variable display pattern table used when it is determined that the display result of the variable display of the identification information of the first variable display unit is not the specific display result. Since the variable display of the identification information in the first variable display unit is executed according to the variable display pattern determined based on the specific period pattern table, the identification of the first variable display unit in the specific period is performed. When it is determined that the display result of the variable display of information is not the specific display result, the variable display can be executed by selecting from a plurality of types of patterns. Further, by using a dedicated variable display pattern table, it is possible to easily increase the ratio of selecting a variable display time longer than normal as the first variable display time of the first variable display unit.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (bullet ball gaming machine) 1 as seen from the front. Note that a pachinko gaming machine is shown here as an example of a gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like. Also good.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  Near the center of the game area 7, a variable display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the variable display device 9 has a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition which is the first execution condition (for example, that the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 13). A display area (hereinafter, referred to as a first variable display portion 9a) for variably displaying an effect decoration pattern (first decoration pattern) and displaying a display result, and establishment of a second start condition that is a second execution condition A display area for variably displaying a plurality of types of decorative designs (second decorative symbols) that can be distinguished from each other based on (for example, that the hit ball has won the second start winning opening 14) and deriving and displaying the display result (Hereinafter referred to as the second variable display portion 9b) and a display area (hereinafter referred to as background pattern) that allows the player to visually recognize the display contents more easily than the first variable display portion 9a and the second variable display portion 9b. Display unit 9c). Note that easy to visually recognize the display content is, for example, that the size of the display area is large, or that the display content in the variable display portion 9a and the second variable display portion 9b is always monochromatic. The display color may change. In this embodiment, the background symbol effect unit 9c controls the display of identification information (hereinafter also referred to as a background symbol) in the three display areas of left, middle, and right. Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result means that the symbol is stopped and displayed (except for the stop before the so-called re-variation). In this embodiment, one background symbol effect part 9c is provided for two variable display parts (first variable display part 9a and second variable display part 9b). Since an effect corresponding to one of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) variably displayed on the two variable display portions is executed, the decorative symbol status (for example, whether the big hit symbol is derived and displayed) It is difficult to grasp whether or not.

  A first special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8a and a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying special symbols as identification information are provided on the upper portion of the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, for example. Has been. The first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b are provided with a larger number of numbers such as 0 to 99 in order to make it difficult to grasp whether the stop symbol is a probability variation symbol or a non-probability variation symbol. It may be configured to variably display. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a may be referred to as a first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b may be referred to as a second special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Some of them may be different. As an example, the first special symbol type includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the second special symbol type is a character other than numbers 0 to 5 and the first special symbol. It is also possible to include characters that are different from the characters.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the number of the first reserved memory (the stored memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol reservation storage display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one. Also, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of reserved memories. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  The first variable display section 9a performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative symbol (for production) during the variable symbol display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a. In addition, the second variable display unit 9b performs variable display of decorative symbols as decorative symbols during the special symbol variable display time by the second special symbol display 8b. The first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that perform variable display of decorative symbols are controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display portion 9a is sometimes referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display portion 9b is sometimes referred to as a second decorative symbol. In addition, the first decorative design and the second decorative design may be collectively referred to as a decorative design. Note that the type of the first decorative design and the type of the second decorative design may be the same (for example, both 0 to 9), or the types may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative design includes numbers 0 to 5 and characters other than numbers, and the type of the second decorative design is a character other than numbers 0 to 5 and the first decorative design. It is also possible to include characters that are different from the characters.

  The display screen of the variable display device 9 is formed with the number of effective winning balls entered into the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved storage number, and the variable winning ball device 15 in a state in which the game balls can be easily received. 2 There is an area (hereinafter referred to as a symbol hold storage display unit 18c) that displays the total number (total number of hold storages) that is the sum of the number of effective winning balls entered into the start winning opening 14, that is, the second hold storage number. In this embodiment, the state in which the variable winning ball device 15 is easy to accept the game ball is when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state. Thus, in this embodiment, by displaying the total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number on the symbol hold memory display unit 18c that is relatively easy to be visually recognized by the player, It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol hold memory display 18a and the second special symbol hold memory display 18b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs smaller than the symbol hold memory display unit 18c, respectively. Although configured, in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, a display of another aspect may be used. As an example, each of the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b is composed of one display, and the display color is different according to the number of reserved memories or the display density is different. I will let you.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the total pending storage number that can be displayed, that is, the total pending storage number is 8. The symbol holding storage display unit 18c increases the number of display areas to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Each time variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of display areas to be lit is reduced by one. Or among the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit 18c, the number of areas displayed in a color determined in advance as the effective start winning is increased by one. Each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of areas displayed in the color determined as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved memory number is set to 4. Therefore, when the first reserved memory number is 4, and a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13, the win becomes an invalid start win that does not satisfy the first start condition. When the first reserved memory number is less than 4 and a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13, the win becomes an effective start win (first effective start win) that satisfies the first start condition. Similarly, when the second reserved memory number is 4, when a game ball wins the second start winning opening 14, the win becomes an invalid start win that does not satisfy the second start condition. When the second reserved memory number is less than 4, when a game ball wins the second start winning opening 14, the win becomes an effective start win (second effective start win) that satisfies the second start condition. In this example, the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved memory number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the combined reserved memory number is set to 8, but these values are only examples. . Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

  In this embodiment, a winning device having a first start winning opening 13 is provided below the variable display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below the first starting winning port 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 (easy to start winning), which is advantageous to the player.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 that opens and closes only at the lower portion of the second starting winning opening 14 is provided. The configuration may be such that a variable winning ball apparatus that opens and closes is provided at any lower portion of the start winning opening 14.

  Below the variable winning ball device 15, a specific gaming state (a big hit gaming state) that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 8a or the second special symbol display unit 8b. Is provided with a special variable winning ball apparatus which is opened by a solenoid 21. The special variable winning ball apparatus includes an opening / closing plate 20 and forms a large winning opening. The game ball that has entered the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided below the variable display device 9. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the left and right lamps (a symbol can be visually recognized when the lamp is lit). For example, if the left lamp is lit when the variable display ends, it is a hit. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 changes from a disadvantageous state to a player's advantageous state when the normal symbol is a winning symbol. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing to the gate 32, the normal symbol hold memory display 41 increments the LED to be turned on by one. Then, every time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  In this embodiment, one ordinary symbol display 10 and one variable winning ball device 15 are provided. However, when two variable winning ball devices are provided, two normal symbol displays are provided. May be.

  A decorative lamp 25 blinkingly displayed during the game is provided around the left and right of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. A top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c provided on the front frame are provided at the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 7. Also, a prize ball lamp 51 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball break lamp 52 that is turned on when the supply ball is cut is provided in the vicinity of the right frame lamp 28c. Is provided.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the big hit game ends or the previous variable display ends) The first start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display unit 8a, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed in the variable display unit 9a. Be started. In other words, the first special symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the total reserved memory number (total number) displayed on the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c Increase by one. However, in this embodiment, even if the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, if the total reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the total reserved memory number displayed on the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c is calculated. Increase by one. However, the increased amount corresponds only to the invalid start prize.

  Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning port 14 and is detected by the second start port switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the end of the big hit game or the previous variable display) Is completed and the second start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display unit 8b, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second variable display unit 9b. The variable display starts. In other words, the second special symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the total number of reserved memory (total number) displayed on the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c on the condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit. Increase by one. However, even if the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, if the combined reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed on the symbol reserved memory display portion 18c is increased by one.

  The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the first special symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state. That is, the special variable winning ball apparatus (large winning opening) is opened until a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the large winning opening. One round in the big hit gaming state is a period until a certain period of time has passed after the big winning opening is opened or until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of hit balls wins the big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls have won the big winning opening, or when a certain period has passed since the opening of the big winning opening, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball apparatus is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). Note that a V winning area may be provided in the grand prize opening, and the continuation right may be generated on condition that the hit ball has won the V winning area while the big prize opening is open.

  When it is decided to change the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stoppage of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 8a to a jackpot symbol with probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, “7”, etc.) Is the normal state (also referred to as a normal gaming state) and the short-time state (a time-shortening state in which the variation time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened, a gaming state advantageous to the player) This is an even more advantageous state for the player, which is a higher probability change state (an example of a special gaming state advantageous to the player). In addition, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined as the probability variation symbol and is controlled to the probability variation state, that is, when the probability variation state is entered, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a becomes the big hit symbol. Not only will the probability increase, but the probability that the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b will be a big hit symbol also increases. In other words, not only the jackpot determination based on the first start prize but also the jackpot determination based on the second start prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than in the normal state.

  The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the second special symbol at the time of stoppage becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state.

  When the second special symbol display unit 8b decides to change the stop symbol at the time when the second special symbol fluctuates to a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol such as “7”). Is controlled to a special gaming state in which the probability of the next big hit is higher than the probability in the normal state and the short time state. That is, it becomes a more advantageous state for the player in a probable change state. In addition, when the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be a probable variation symbol and is controlled to the special gaming state after the big hit gaming state, there is a probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a big hit symbol. In addition to the increase, the probability that the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a becomes a big hit symbol also increases. In other words, not only the jackpot determination based on the second start prize but also the jackpot determination based on the first start prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than in the normal state.

  In the probability variation state as the special game state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are jackpot symbols ( The probability of becoming a specific display result (for example, an odd number of 0 to 9) is increased from the normal state. Further, in the normal symbol display 10, the probability that the stop symbol becomes a winning symbol is increased from the normal state, and one or both of the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased from the normal state. This is a more advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state, the variable display time (variation time) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is made shorter than the normal state. Also good. In such a case, variable display of special symbols is frequently executed, which also increases the possibility of occurrence of jackpots per predetermined time. Further, in the probability variation state, the variable symbol display time (variation time) of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 may be made shorter than that in the normal state. In that case, the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 is more likely to occur, the number of variable display times of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b within a predetermined period is increased, and the second special symbol is increased. Is more likely to be a big hit symbol than in the normal state, making it more advantageous for the player. Further, in the probability variation state, the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol may be increased, or the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is released may be increased or the opening time may be lengthened.

  There may be a difference between the special game state when the stop symbol of the first special symbol becomes a probability variation symbol and the special game state when the stop symbol of the second special symbol becomes a probability variation symbol. For example, the special game state when the stop symbol of the first special symbol becomes a probabilistic symbol is changed to a probable state, and the special game state when the stop symbol of the second special symbol becomes a probabilistic symbol is set to a short time state (a big hit occurs) (The game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened), but when the stop symbol of the first special symbol becomes a probabilistic symbol, the stop symbol of the second special symbol You may comprise so that it may become a more advantageous state for a player than when it becomes a probable variation symbol. By configuring as such, the interest given to the player can be further improved.

  The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display portion 9b. Here, the synchronization means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display portion 9a. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display portion 9b.

  Further, when the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, a decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that reminds the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display portion 9a. When the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, a special decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that recalls the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display portion 9b.

  In the background symbol display unit 9c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbols are variably displayed in three display areas in the background symbol display unit 9c. When performing a reach effect, for example, the left and right background symbols are stopped and displayed during variable display. Although there are exceptions as will be described later, basically when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived on the background symbol display unit 9c. Displayed (background symbols are finally stopped in the three display areas). If the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left Three background symbols with the middle right aligned). Hereinafter, such background symbols are also referred to as jackpot symbols.

  When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbols are variably displayed in three display areas in the background symbol display unit 9c.

  When the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and at the same time the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. An effect corresponding to any one of the variable displays is executed.

  When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed alone, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finished, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finished. When the symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends, and the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is delayed. When the special symbol for which variable display ends is stopped and displayed, variable display of the background symbol ends. However, in this embodiment, exceptionally, when the special symbol whose variable display ends earlier is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol may end.

  Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) for a background symbol that has not stopped yet when the stopped background symbol constitutes part of the jackpot symbol among the three background symbols. ) And all or some of the background symbols are displayed in a synchronized manner while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol.

  For example, a decorative symbol (for example, “7”) that becomes a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display regions of the left, middle, and right display regions in the background symbol display unit 9c. The display area in the middle is still being displayed in a variable manner, and all or some of the symbols in the display area are changing and displaying synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, the background) The variable display is performed on all of the left, middle, and right display areas in the symbol display unit 9c, and the variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are aligned.

  In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance is performed with a lamp or sound. The effect and the reach display mode in the background symbol display unit 9c are called reach effects. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the background symbol) is displayed, or the background of the background symbol display unit 9c (a ground color or pattern different from the symbol and the character) Etc.) may be changed (for example, color).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31 and is variable. An output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening / closing the winning ball apparatus 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening / closing the special variable winning ball apparatus in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31 for game control when the power is turned on. A system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the microcomputer 560 and an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer. Are mounted on the main board 31. The main board 31 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting a test signal to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The display control is performed on the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that receive and variably display the decorative symbol, the background symbol display unit 9c that variably displays the background symbol, and the symbol hold storage display unit 18c.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the variable display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the input / output port 105. The effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the input / output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input / output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input / output driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are communicated between the effect control CPU 101, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70 in such a way that a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side. Communication).

  The effect control CPU 101 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data frequently used among images displayed on the variable display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol, etc. (including a decorative design and a background design). It is for keeping. The effect control CPU 101 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 101.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the variable display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the variable display device 9.

  In this embodiment, an effect control board 80, an audio output board 70, and a lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. It may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the variable display device 9 is mounted, and a second circuit on which other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with this production control board. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but other boards (for example, the audio output board 70 and the lamp shown in FIG. It may be transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 in the production control board 80 via the driver board 35 and the like. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35, and the control means receives the command. Control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 that controls the variable display device 9 as it is or, for example, by changing it to a simplified command. May be. In addition, when two boards, the first effect control board and the second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 is transmitted to the second effect control board, A command is transmitted as it is from the second effect control board to the first effect control board, or is transmitted after processing (for example, changing the command form or contents, simplifying, or selecting only necessary commands). You may comprise.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the gaming machine is turned on and the input level of the reset terminal to which a reset signal is input becomes high level, the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether the contents of the program are valid. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). Then, initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is the interrupt address. Is the mode shown.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process. In this example, if “55H” is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is a backup (ON state), and if a value other than “55H” is set, it means that there is no backup (OFF state).

  After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 56 performs a data check of the backup RAM area (parity check in this example) (step S8). In step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S91 and S92, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and in accordance with the contents, the control command (power) indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 80. Control is performed such that a recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery is transmitted (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, a ball out flag, and a payout stop An initial value is set to a flag such as a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (step S14). Examples of the initialization command include a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the variable display device 9.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining an initial value of a count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a big hit determination random number generation counter). A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game device such as a variable display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In a process for transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a game device control process), the count value of the random number generation counter for jackpot determination is one round (a random number generation counter for jackpot determination, etc.) When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value that can be taken, the initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output when, for example, a voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a big hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Decide whether or not to generate a big hit (for big hit judgment)
(2) Random 2: A special symbol that generates a big hit is determined (for determining a big hit symbol)
(3) Random 3: Determine the special symbol's off symbol (for determining off symbol)
(4) Random 4: Type of jackpot, that is, regular jackpot that executes the re-lottery effect after the end of the jackpot game, short-time jackpot, probability variable jackpot and short-time jackpot at the probability change, normal jackpot that does not execute the lottery game after the jackpot game ends, hourly jackpot Decide whether to make a promising big hit or a promising short and big hit (for big hit type determination)
(5) Random 5: Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (for variation pattern determination)
(6) Random 6: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(7) Random 7: Determine initial value of random 1 (for determining random 1 initial value)
(8) Random 8: Determine initial value of random 6 (for determining random 6 initial value)
(9) Random 9: Decide whether to end (puncture) the probability variation state (for lottery determination). Random 9 takes a value in the range of 0-49. In the probability changing state, the game control microcomputer 560 terminates the probability changing state when, for example, the random number 9 matches one predetermined value. Therefore, the probability variation state ends (probability variation puncture) with a probability of 1/50. It should be noted that a determination value table in which one value to be compared with random 9 is set and a determination value table in which two or more values are set are prepared, and any determination is made when deciding whether to end the probability variation state. It may be determined whether to use the value table, and the probability variation state may be terminated when the value set in the determined determination value table matches the random 9. Specifically, for example, a determination value table in which one value to be compared with random 9 is set and a determination value table in which two values are set may be prepared, selected, and used. In this case, the probability variation state ends (probability variation puncture) with a probability of 1/50 or 1/25 depending on the determination value table used. Also, a determination value table to be used may be determined depending on the probability variation symbol, and the probability of probability variation puncture may be varied depending on the probability variation symbol. Then, the background pattern and background color displayed on the variable display device 9 or the character displayed on the variable display device 9 is made different depending on the difference in probability puncture probability. You may make it alert | report to.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 uses (1) a big hit determination random number, (2) a big hit symbol determination random number, and (3) an off symbol determination random number. , (4) the big hit type determination random number and (6) the normal symbol per random number for determination are counted up (added by 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In order to enhance the game effect, random numbers other than the random numbers (1) to (9) are also used.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a first special symbol process (step S26A). In the first special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state. Next, the CPU 56 performs a second special symbol process (step S26B). In the second special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a second special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol display 8b and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state.

  Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a hold storage process (step S27a). In the pending storage process, the CPU 56 executes a process for calculating and managing the total number (total pending stored number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved memories (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 provides the output port with contents relating to solenoid on / off in the RAM area of the output port. Output (step S31: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the first special symbol display control data for effect display of the first special symbol in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data according to the value of the first special symbol process flag. In addition, the special symbol display for setting the second special symbol display control data for effect display of the second special symbol according to the value of the second special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data A control process is performed (step S32). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby variably displaying the special symbols on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. Execute.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, if the normal symbol fluctuation speed is such that the display state (“◯” and “×”) is switched every 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 sets the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. The display control data value to be switched (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “×”) is switched. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. It may be executed in step (b).

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the CPU 56 Control is performed so that a big hit does not occur simultaneously in the two displays.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination value. The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the counter for generating the big hit determination random number at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the big hit determination random value. If it matches the judgment value, it is determined to be a big hit. In the normal state, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number value with the numerical value described in the left column in FIG. 7, and in the probability variation state, the jackpot determination random number value is described in the right column in FIG. 7. Compare with the number you have. The numerical value described in the left column in FIG. 7 is set in the ROM 54 as a normal big hit determination value, and the numerical value described in the right column in FIG. 7 is set in the ROM 54 as a probability change big hit determination value.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to display the symbol hold storage display unit 18c. As shown in FIG. 8A, up to eight total numbers can be displayed as a total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number on the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c. When the first start condition is established, if the variable display of the first special symbol is not in a state that can be started, the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c is provided on the condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by one. In addition, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c is provided on the condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by one (see FIG. 8B).

  However, as illustrated in FIG. 8C, in this embodiment, even if the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value, if the total number has not reached the upper limit value, the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c. Increase the total number displayed in. However, as described above, the increment corresponds only to the invalid start prize.

  FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are explanatory diagrams showing the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in this embodiment. EXT shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, 12 types of first variation patterns # 1 to # 8 and # 11 to # 14 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. 12 types of second variation patterns # 1 to # 8 and # 11 to # 14 are used. Each of the first variation patterns # 1 to # 8 and # 11 to # 14 is the same as each of the second variation patterns # 1 to # 8 and # 11 to # 14, but is different as an effect control command. As such, they are shown separately in FIGS. Hereinafter, for example, the variation pattern #n (n = 1 to 8, 11 to 14) means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the variation patterns # 1 to # 4 are used in the normal state and the probability variation state, and the variation patterns # 5 to # 8 are used in the time reduction state. That is, the fluctuation time is the same between the normal time and the probability change time. It should be noted that, compared to the normal state, which is the normal state, in the probability variation state, the fluctuation time at the time of a deviation variation (a variation in which the stop symbol does not become a big hit symbol and does not reach) may be shortened.

  Further, data indicating each of the variation patterns # 1 to # 4 is stored in the ROM 54 as a normal / probability variation pattern table corresponding to a random 5 possible value. In addition, data indicating each of the variation patterns # 5 to # 8 is stored in the ROM 54 as a short-time variation pattern table in correspondence with the values that can be taken by random 5. That is, the CPU 56 refers to the normal / accuracy variable pattern table or the variable pattern table by referring to the normal / accurate variable pattern table according to the extracted random value 5 during normal operation, probable change, or short operation time. decide. If it is decided to win, the CPU 56 does not select the variation patterns # 1, # 5, # 11 and # 15.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, a variation pattern of the shortening variation is used in accordance with the value of the total number of pending storages calculated in the pending storage process. For example, if the value of the total pending storage number is a predetermined value (for example, 4) or more, the first variation pattern # 5 or the second variation pattern 5 that is a shortened variation (5 seconds in this example) is used.

  Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, it is determined that the display result of the second special symbol indicator 8b (and the second variable display unit 9b) is already a big hit symbol. Therefore, it is determined that the display result of the first special symbol display unit 8a (and the first variable display unit 9a) is to be used as a symbol without condition without performing the big hit determination process. Alternatively, based on the fact that the display result of the first special symbol indicator 8a (and the first variable display unit 9a) has already been determined to be the big hit symbol in the second special symbol stop symbol setting processing, the big hit determination processing is performed. Without performing it, it is determined that the display result of the second special symbol display 8b (and the second variable display unit 9b) is unconditionally left as a symbol. Hereinafter, unconditionally determining that the display result of the first special symbol display unit 8a or the second special symbol display unit 8b is to be an off symbol may be referred to as “forced deviation”.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, the variation patterns # 11 to # 14 are used in the forced off state. In addition, data indicating each of the variation patterns # 11 to # 14 is stored in the ROM 54 as a forced deviation variation pattern table in association with the values that can be taken by random 5. That is, the CPU 56 determines one variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern table at the time of forced deviation according to the extracted random value 5 at the time of forced deviation determination.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the display result of the first special symbol display unit 8a and the first variable display unit 9a (or the second special symbol display unit 8b and the second variable display unit 9b) is a big hit unconditionally. Forcibly out-of-force variation pattern table, which is a dedicated variation pattern table used when it is determined not to be used. The game control means executes variable display of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol (or the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol) according to the variation pattern determined based on the forced deviation variation pattern table. Therefore, when it is determined that the display result of the first special symbol display unit 8a and the first variable display unit 9a (or the second special symbol display unit 8b and the second variable display unit 9b) is not a big hit unconditionally, Variable display can be executed by selecting from a plurality of types of variation patterns. Further, by using a dedicated variation pattern table, the variation time of the first special symbol display unit 8a and the first variable display unit 9a (or the second special symbol display unit 8b and the second variable display unit 9b) is longer than usual. The ratio of selecting the variation time can be easily increased.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the types of background pattern variation patterns (variation times). In this embodiment, 19 types (No. 1, No. 2, No. 4, No. 6, No. 9, No. 10, No. 2 * to No. 8 * and No. 11 * to No. 17 *) variation patterns are used. However, in FIG. 3 *, no. 5 *, No. 7 *, no. 8 *, no. 11 * -No. No. 17 which is not actually used for reasons such as showing the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode (presence or absence of temporary stop) of the fluctuation pattern of 17 *. 3, no. 5, no. 7, no. 8, no. 11-No. 17 is also described. No. 1-No. The variation time of 8 is No. 10-No. It is the same as 17 variation times. However, no. 10-No. In the 17 variation patterns, there is a temporary stop state in the variation pattern. The number of temporary stops is not limited to one, and a plurality of temporary stops may be made during the variation pattern. The temporary stop refers to a stop when variable display is executed again after the background symbol is temporarily stopped. In addition, when temporarily stopped, for example, it may be fluctuated minutely (swing fluctuation) repeatedly in the vertical direction. No. 2 * -No. The variation time of 8 * is No. 2-No. 8 is the same as the fluctuation time, but no. 2 * -No. As an example, the background pattern fluctuation pattern of 8 * is high-speed fluctuation in the first 5 seconds (for example, the left, middle and right background patterns are high-speed fluctuation respectively), and after 5 seconds, for example, the left and right background symbols are aligned and stopped. The variation pattern is such that a reach effect is performed in the background symbol display unit 9c. No. 11 * -No. The variation time of 17 * is No. 11-No. No. 17 which is the same as the fluctuation time of No. 17, but also includes a temporary stop state. 11 * -No. As an example, the background symbol variation pattern of 17 * is a high-speed variation in the first 5 seconds (for example, the left, middle and right background symbols are each rapidly varied), and after 5 seconds, for example, the left and right background symbols are aligned and stopped. The variation pattern is such that a reach effect is performed in the background symbol display unit 9c. No. 2-No. When using the background symbol variation pattern of the eight background symbol variation patterns, the effect control microcomputer 100 stops, for example, the left and right background symbols together when the normal variation is completed. No. 2-No. The background symbol variation pattern of the background symbol variation pattern 8 is a variation pattern in which a reach effect is performed.

  The background symbol variation pattern No. 1 and no. Reference numeral 10 denotes a fluctuation pattern in which the background symbol normally fluctuates (fluctuation not accompanied by a reach mode). In addition, the background design variation pattern No. 9 is a variation pattern in which the background symbol fluctuates at high speed (variation in which the displayed background symbol changes in a short time compared to the normal variation). In this embodiment, as will be described later, if the value of the total pending storage display counter is a predetermined value (for example, 4) or more, the background symbol variation pattern No. Nine aspects are used. Also, if the value of the total pending storage display counter is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the background symbol variation pattern No. 1 or No. Ten embodiments are used.

  In addition, the variation pattern that is “reach variation” is a variation pattern that displays the reach mode before the variation time elapses. Specifically, a background symbol variation pattern in which “*” is not added to the background symbol variation pattern name is a background symbol variation pattern selected when the variation of the background symbol is started (in the processes of steps S922 and S923). The selected background symbol variation patterns No. 1 and No. 10), the background symbol variation pattern selected at the switching timing when the background symbol variation to be described later is not switched (selected in the processes of steps S969 and S959). The background symbol variation pattern No. 2, No. 4, No. 6) and the background symbol variation are switched, but the variation time after the switching (the overall variation time from the variation start to the variation end) is 10 seconds. Selected background pattern variation patterns (background symbol variation patterns No. 1 and No. 10) a. The background symbol variation pattern with “*” added to the background symbol variation pattern name is selected as the background symbol variation pattern after the switching when the background symbol variation is switched (in step S983). The background symbol variation patterns No. 2 * to No. 7 * selected in the processing, the background symbol variation patterns No. 11 * to No. 16 * selected in the processing in Step S982, and the processing in Step S642. No. 4 *, No. 6 *, No. 8 * and No. 13 *, No. 15 *, No. 17 *) selected in the process of step S641.

  The type of variable display time (fluctuation time) shown in FIG. 11 is different from the type of fluctuation time shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. The difference is that, in principle, the variable display of the background symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol (meaning that the variable display time is the same), but the variable display period of the first special symbol is When the variable display period of the second special symbol partially overlaps, the background symbol variation time does not match the first special symbol variation time nor the second special symbol variation time. It is. For example, the variation time of the first special symbol is 10 seconds, the variation time of the second special symbol is 20 seconds, and the variable display period of the first special symbol overlaps the variable display period of the second special symbol for 5 seconds. In this case, when the background symbol variable display and the special symbol variable display are synchronized, the background symbol variation time becomes 25 seconds.

  When the variable display period of the first special symbol and the variable display period of the second special symbol do not overlap, the background symbol variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol is the background symbol shown in FIG. This is realized by a combination of two of the variation patterns (one is No. 1 or No. 10). For example, when the variation time (variable display time) of the special symbol is 20 seconds, No. 1 and no. 2 is used.

  12-17 is explanatory drawing which shows typically an example of the relationship between the variable display of a special symbol and a decoration symbol, and the variable display (fluctuation) of a background symbol. FIG. 12 shows an example where the variable display period of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol does not overlap with the variable display period of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. In this case, the background symbol varies in synchronization with the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, or the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol.

  FIG. 13 shows an example in which, after the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol start to change, the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol start to change before the change ends. And the case where the variation time of a 2nd special symbol and a 2nd decoration symbol is longer than the remaining time of the variation time of a 1st special symbol and a 1st decoration symbol is shown. In that case, when the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol start to change, the background symbol starts to change. When the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol start to change, the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol start. When the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol change, the background symbol also ends. However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the variation of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol is not immediately switched when the variation of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol is started. It is controlled to switch when a certain time has elapsed from the start. By executing such control, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change of the change pattern immediately after the start of the change of the background symbol. In this embodiment, although there are exceptions, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol is executed, or the variable display of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol is executed. When the variable display of the background symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol or the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol is executed and a predetermined variable display time has passed, The effect result corresponding to the display result of the variable display of the special symbol and the first decorative symbol or the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the background symbol display unit 9c. Therefore, the fluctuation of the background symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is, for example, the case where the variation of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is a normal variation (in this embodiment, the variation time is a variation of 10 seconds). It does not include reach effects (for example, it stops when the left and right symbols are aligned in the middle of the change), and the stop symbol is a variation in the form of a disjoint symbol. This is a variation of the aspect in which the stop symbol becomes a big hit symbol, including the reach effect in the case of variation. In addition, hereinafter, a point in time when a certain amount of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol is referred to as a switching point.

  FIG. 14 shows that after the change of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol is started, the change of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol is started before the change is finished, and the second special symbol is changed. And the example in case the fluctuation | variation of a 2nd decoration symbol is complete | finished is shown. In that case, when the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol start to change, the background symbol starts to change. When the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol start to change, the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol start. The change of the background symbol is also terminated at the end of the variation of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol without switching to the variation corresponding to the variation of.

  FIG. 15 shows the variation of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol (stop symbol) before the variation has ended after the variation of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol has started. Is a big hit symbol) and the variation of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol ends at a time before the end of the variation of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol within a predetermined time. Show. In that case, when the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol start to change, the background symbol starts to change. When the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol start to change, the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol start. The change of the background symbol also ends at the end of the change of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol without changing to the change corresponding to the change of the first symbol, but the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the background symbol display portion 9c.

  FIG. 16 shows the variation of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol (stop symbol) before the variation is finished after the variation of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol is started (the stop symbol is off). Is a big hit symbol), and the change of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol ends at a time before the predetermined time has passed since the end of the variation of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol Show. In that case, when the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol start to change, the background symbol starts to change, and when the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol start to change, the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol However, at the end of the change of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol, the change of the background symbol is also ended, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the background symbol display portion 9c.

  FIG. 17 shows an example in which the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol are shortened and changed. When the first start condition is satisfied, if the value of the total pending storage number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 4), the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol are shortened as shown in FIG. (Variation time 5 seconds). In addition, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the value of the total pending storage number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 4), the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol are shortened (change time 5 seconds). )I do. In this case, the background symbol is shortened and fluctuated (fluctuation time: 5 seconds) in synchronization with the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, or the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol.

  Hereinafter, the switching points and the total number of pending storages will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. In this embodiment, the switching point is 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol. However, 10 seconds is just an example. Also, in FIGS. 18 to 22, the case where the first special symbol and the variation of the first decorative symbol are started earlier than the variation of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol is exemplified. When the variation of the second special symbol and the first decorative symbol is started earlier than the variation of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, the change is made after 10 seconds from the start of the variation of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. It is a point.

  FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing a case where the variation of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol is started before the switching point is reached. At the switching point, the remaining time of the variation time of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol is longer than the remaining time of the variation time of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol. And the case where the remaining time of the variation time of a 2nd special symbol and a 2nd decoration symbol is 25 second is illustrated. In that case, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the background symbol variation pattern No. as the background symbol variation pattern at the switching point. No. 1 background pattern variation pattern No. Control is performed so as to switch to a 5 * variation mode (see FIG. 11). In this example, the background symbol variation pattern No. The change of 1 corresponds to the change of the background symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol. The variation of 5 * corresponds to the variation of the background symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol.

  In this embodiment, when the background symbol change is started, the background symbol change pattern No. is changed according to the value of the summation pending storage display counter described later. 1, no. 9 or No. Ten embodiments are used. For example, if the value of the total pending storage display counter is a predetermined value (for example, 4) or more, the background symbol variation pattern No. Nine aspects are used. Also, if the value of the total pending storage display counter is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the background symbol variation pattern No. 1 or No. Ten embodiments are used. 18 to 22, the background symbol variation pattern No. 1 or No. The case where ten aspects are used is shown.

  The first reserved memory number is decremented by 1 when the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol start changing, and the second reserved memory number is decremented by 1 when the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol start changing. The total reserved memory number is decremented by 1 when the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol start to be changed, and when the background symbol changes corresponding to the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol, that is, the switching point. 1 is subtracted.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing another example when the variation of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol is started before becoming the switching point. At the switching point, the remaining time of the variation time of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol is longer than the remaining time of the variation time of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. And the case where the remaining time of the variation time of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol is 20 seconds is illustrated. In that case, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the background symbol variation pattern No. as the background symbol variation pattern at the switching point. No. 1 background pattern variation pattern No. Control is performed so as to switch to a mode of variation of 4 (see FIG. 11). In this example, the background symbol variation pattern No. 1 fluctuation and background pattern fluctuation pattern No. 1 The variation of 4 corresponds to the variation of the background symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol. The first special symbol is controlled by the game control microcomputer 560, while the first decorative symbol is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100. When the production control microcomputer 100 receives the production control command indicating the first variation pattern # 3, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control so that the variation of the first decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 19 is performed, and the variation of the first decorative symbol is performed. The background symbol variation corresponding to the background symbol variation pattern No. 1 fluctuation and background pattern fluctuation pattern No. 1 4 to achieve.

  In the case illustrated in FIG. 19, that is, at the switching point, the mode corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol is not switched to the mode corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 does not subtract the total pending storage number at the switching point.

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a case where the change of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol is started after becoming the switching point. At that time, the variation time of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol is longer than the remaining time of the variation time of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol. And the case where the variation time of a 2nd special design and a 2nd decoration design is 30 seconds is illustrated. In that case, the production control microcomputer 100 indicates the background symbol variation mode at the time as the background symbol variation pattern No. 4 from the background design variation pattern No. Control is performed so as to switch to a 6 * variation mode (see FIG. 11). Also, 1 is subtracted from the total pending storage number. Since the change of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol has not started at the switching point, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol at the switching point. The background symbol variation pattern No. corresponding to 20 seconds, which is the time. 4 is selected.

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a case where the change of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol is started after becoming the switching point. At that time, the variation time of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol is longer than the remaining time of the variation time of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 does not switch the background pattern variation mode. Since the change of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol has not started at the switching point, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol at the switching point. The background symbol variation pattern No. 6 is selected.

  As described above, the total reserved memory number is a total number that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. However, the production control microcomputer 100 may include the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number. Even if the storage number has reached the upper limit value, the total pending storage number is incremented by 1 if the total pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value. However, the increase corresponds to the invalid start prize. In addition, the total number of reserved memories is decremented by 1 when the background symbol change corresponding to the change of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is started. As will be described later, the change start time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. In some cases, the start time of the background symbol change corresponding to this is delayed. Therefore, the total number of reserved storage (total number) displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c may be larger than the true total number. Therefore, it is necessary to reduce the dummy reserved memory in the total number of reserved memories by some method. Hereinafter, the difference between the true total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number and the combined reserved memory number (from the true total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number in the combined reserved memory number) Is also called dummy increase. In addition, the amount corresponding to the number of dummy increases in the total hold storage is dummy hold storage.

  In this embodiment, as one of the methods for reducing the dummy reserved memory, the background symbol variation pattern including a temporary stop (for example, 0.5 second or one second pause) mode as the background symbol variation pattern (see FIG. 11). Is used. Then, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 22, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the total pending storage number when the background symbol is temporarily stopped.

  Therefore, when the background symbol is temporarily stopped, 1 is added to the total reserved memory number, so that the player feels as if the total reserved memory number has been subtracted by 1 due to the re-variation of the background symbol after the temporary stop. Can be made. In other words, one background symbol variation based on one hold storage is actually executed, but a plurality of variations corresponding to one temporary stop and the next temporary stop are performed. It is possible to make each player feel as if the sum of the number of pending storages has been subtracted, and to prevent the player from feeling as uncomfortable as possible.

  In the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 12 to 22, only the variation of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, or the variation of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol is the variation of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. In the case of starting earlier, only the variation of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol, or the variation of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol is the same as that of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol. Even when it starts before the change, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the same control as in the case illustrated in FIGS. That is, the production control microcomputer 100 also executes control when “first” is read as “second” and “second” is read as “first” in the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. .

  FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a relationship between a special symbol stop symbol and a gaming state controlled thereafter. In the example shown in FIG. 23, when the stop symbol is an even symbol, the game is out of the game. When the stop symbol is an odd symbol, it is a big hit, and after the change of the special symbol, the game is shifted to the big hit game state. A symbol that shifts to a jackpot gaming state after the end of a special symbol change is called a jackpot symbol. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the first special symbol by lottery, and determines whether to shift to a probable change state (including a probable change short state) or a short time state using a random number or the like. I do. Also, the production control microcomputer 100 uses electrical components provided in the gaming machine after the big hit game is started (for example, during the big hit game or at the end of the big hit game) when the probability variation big hit occurs. Announcement of probable big hit. In such a configuration, the player can no longer grasp the change in the game state from the stop symbol, and the change in the game state can be grasped for the first time by notification, so that the interest of the game is improved. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol variably displayed and stopped on the first variable display portion 9a and the second variable display portion 9b are numerals, alphabets, character-shaped symbols, and character-shaped display objects. Any other symbol may be used.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the hold storage process. In the hold storage process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 (whether or not it has been detected by the first start opening switch 13a) (step S2751A). If the game ball has won a prize, it is checked whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for storing the first reserved memory number has reached an upper limit of 4 (step S2751B). If the value of the first reserved memory number counter has not reached the upper limit value, the value of the first reserved memory number counter is incremented by 1 (step S2752). If the value of the difference counter is 0 (step S2753), the value of the total pending memory number counter indicating the total pending memory number, that is, the total pending memory number counter for counting the total pending memory number is incremented by 1 (step S2756). .

  If the value of the difference counter is not 0, the value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed, and if the value of the total pending storage number counter has not reached the upper limit of 8 (step S2754), the process proceeds to step S2756. To do. If the value of the total pending storage number counter has reached 8, the value of the difference counter is decremented by 1 (step S2755), and the process ends.

  Further, it is confirmed whether or not a game ball has won the second start winning port 14 (whether or not it has been detected by the second start port switch 14a) (step S2757A), and the game ball has won the second start winning port 14 and won. If so, it is checked whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for storing the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit of 4 (step S2757B). If the value of the second reserved memory number counter has not reached the upper limit value, the value of the second reserved memory number counter is incremented by 1 (step S2758). If the value of the difference counter is 0 (step S2759), the process proceeds to step S2756.

  If the value of the difference counter is not 0, the value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the value of the total pending storage number counter has not reached the upper limit of 8 (step S2760), the process proceeds to step S2756. To do. If the value of the total pending storage number counter has reached 8, the value of the difference counter is decremented by 1 (step S2761), and the process ends.

  When the value of the first reserved memory number counter reaches the upper limit value of 4 or when the value of the second reserved memory number counter reaches the upper limit value of 4, the CPU 56 It is checked whether or not the counter value has reached the upper limit of 8 (step S2763). If the value of the total pending storage number counter has not reached 8, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1 (step S2764), the value of the difference counter is incremented by 1 (step S2765), and the process ends.

  The total pending storage number counter is a counter indicating the total pending storage number recognized by the CPU 56. The difference number counter is a counter indicating the number of dummy increases. The value of the first reserved memory number counter indicates the first reserved memory number recognized by the CPU 56. The value of the second reserved memory number counter indicates the second reserved memory number recognized by the CPU 56.

  The CPU 56 receives a game ball in the first start winning opening 13 while the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit of 4, or the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit of 4. In this state, when a game ball wins the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when an invalid start win occurs), the value of the total pending storage number counter is an upper limit value by the processing of steps S2763 to S2765. As long as it has not reached, the total pending storage number is increased by one. That is, the dummy increase number is increased by one.

  In addition, when the CPU 56 determines that the first start winning has occurred when the number of dummy increases is 1 or more and the value of the total pending storage number counter reaches the upper limit value by the processing of steps S2753 to S2755. The dummy increase is decreased by 1 and the dummy reserved memory is digested. That is, the dummy pending storage is reduced. In addition, if the number of dummy increase is 1 or more and the value of the total pending storage number counter reaches the upper limit value by the processing of steps S2759 to S2761, the second increase in winning occurs, the dummy increase Decrease the number by 1 and digest the dummy reserved memory. When the dummy increase number is 1 or more and the value of the total pending storage number counter reaches 8 which is the upper limit value, the first pending storage number reaches 4 which is the upper limit value. Either a dummy reserved storage has occurred because an invalid start winning has occurred at the first start winning opening 13, or an invalid start winning has occurred at the second starting winning opening 14 with the second reserved storage number reaching the upper limit of 4. This means that a dummy pending storage has occurred.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process (step S26A) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the first special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball apparatus is executed. The program for the second special symbol process (step S26B) is similarly configured. That is, in the following description, if “first” is read as “second” and “second” is read as “first”, the second special symbol process will be described.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed by the two displays of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. . In this embodiment, control is performed so that the big hit based on the fact that the big win symbol is derived and displayed on the two displays is not generated at the same time.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state includes a normal state, a probability change state, a time reduction state, and a probability change time reduction state. Then, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, control is performed so as to shift to any one of the three gaming states. Control relating to the transition of the gaming state is performed based on ON / OFF (set / reset) of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag.

  When the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process, the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that a game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. In other words, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the first start winning opening 13 has occurred (step S311), a first start opening switch passing process is executed (step S312).

  When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to any one of the second big hit symbol stop process to the second big hit end process (step S314), the processes of steps S315 and S316 are executed. Thereafter, the first special symbol process is terminated. Otherwise, after executing the processes of steps S317 and S318, any one of steps S300 to S309 is performed according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag). Do. In this embodiment, the values corresponding to the second jackpot symbol stop process to the second jackpot end process are continuous values (for example, 5 to 9). Therefore, the determination process of step S314 of the CPU 56 can be simplified.

  In step S315, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the first decorative design and the first special design are changing, and the first interrupt designation command has not been transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. If it is not changing, or if it is already changing and the first interrupt designation command has already been transmitted (for example, when the first interrupt designation command is transmitted, the transmitted flag is set and the transmitted flag is set) If it has been changed), the process ends, but if the first interruption designation command has not been transmitted yet, the first interruption designation command has been transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. The process is terminated later (step S316). In step S317, the CPU 56 transmits the first interruption designation command (for example, when the transmission completion flag is set by setting the transmission completion flag when the first interruption designation command is transmitted). When the process of step S317 is executed, after the first restart designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100, any one of steps S300 to S309 is performed. Note that the CPU 56 can determine whether or not the first decorative symbol and the first special symbol are changing depending on whether or not the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the processing in step S303. Further, whether or not the second big hit game is being executed can be determined by the second special symbol process flag. That is, when the value of the second special symbol process flag handled in the second special symbol process is a value corresponding to steps S305 to S309, it is determined that the second big hit game is being executed.

  When receiving the first interrupt designation command, the effect control CPU 101 of the effect control microcomputer 100 interrupts the variation (variable display) of the first decorative symbol. Further, when the first resumption designation command is received, the variation of the first decorative symbol is resumed.

  The processes in steps S300 to S309 are as follows.

  First special symbol normal process (step S300): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of numerical data stored in the first reserved memory number buffer (the number of reserved memories). The number of numerical data stored in the first reserved memory number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the first reserved memory number counter. Further, if the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state, and whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is set as the specific display result ( Decide whether or not to win. In the case of a specific display result, the first big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The first big hit flag is reset when the big hit game ends.

  First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S301): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. If the first big hit flag is not set, an effect control command (outgoing designation command) for designating that the display result of the first variable display portion 9a is an out of symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 80. If the first jackpot flag is set, the display result of the first variable display unit 9a is determined to be the display result corresponding to which jackpot type among the specific display results (big jackpot symbol). The types of jackpots include normal jackpots that do not execute the re-lottery effect after the jackpot game is finished, short-time jackpots, probability variable jackpots and short-term jackpots when the jackpot game ends, and regular jackpots that perform the re-lottery effect after the jackpot game ends There is a time bonus. When the jackpot type is determined to be a normal jackpot in which the lottery symbol re-lottering effect is not executed in the first variable display portion 9a after the jackpot game ends, the display result of the first variable display portion 9a is designated as a normal symbol. When an effect control command (ordinary jackpot designation command) to be transmitted is transmitted to the effect control board 80, and when the short-term bonus is not executed, the display result of the first variable display portion 9a is designated as a time-short symbol. When the production control command (time / short jackpot designation command) to be transmitted is transmitted to the production control board 80 and it is determined that the probability variation big prize is not executed, the designation result is designated as the probability variation symbol. When the production control command (probability change big hit designation command) to be sent is sent to the production control board 80 and the decision is made as the probability change time big hit that does not execute the re-lottery production, Display result of the variable display portion 9a is sent to the effect control command (probability variation time reduction jackpot specifying command) the performance control board 80 which specifies that the probability variation time reduction pattern. In addition, when the jackpot type is determined to be a regular jackpot in which the first variable display unit 9a executes the lottery symbol re-drawing effect after the jackpot game ends, the display result of the first variable display unit 9a is a normal symbol. When the effect control command (ordinary jackpot designation command with re-lottery designation) is transmitted to the effect control board 80 and the re-lottery effect is executed, the time is determined as 1 An effect control command for designating that the display result of the variable display section 9a is a time-short symbol and for executing a re-lottery effect is transmitted to the effect control board 80 and re-designated. When it is determined that the probability variation jackpot for executing the lottery effect, it is designated that the display result of the first variable display portion 9a is a probability variation symbol, and the re-lottery effect is executed. When the production control command (probable change big hit designation command with re-lottery) is transmitted to the production control board 80 and it is determined as the probable time bonus for executing the re-lottery production, the display result of the first variable display section 9a is displayed. Is transmitted to the effect control board 80. The effect control command for specifying that the symbol is a probability change time short symbol and that the re-lottery effect is to be executed (the probability change time bonus combination command with re-lottery) is transmitted to the effect control board 80. Further, the stop symbol of the first special symbol after the variable display is determined. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) according to step S302.

  The “re-lottery effect” refers to a case where it is determined in advance that a jackpot symbol (normal symbol, time-short symbol, probability variation symbol or probability variation symbol) is derived and displayed on the first variable display portion 9a. 1 In the variable display portion 9a, the left, middle and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped with the same symbol (normal symbol, short-time symbol or probability variable symbol) aligned, and the symbol in the aligned state is changed again and then the big hit symbol is displayed. This refers to an effect of deriving and displaying (normal symbol, time-short symbol, probability variation symbol, or probability variation symbol).

  Specifically, the following pattern can be considered as the re-lottery effect. First, as a re-lottery effect that does not promote the jackpot symbol, after stopping and displaying the normal symbol, the short-time symbol, and the probability variation symbol, such a symbol is changed again, and again the normal symbol and the short-time symbol are displayed. This is a pattern for deriving and displaying probability variation symbols. In this case, for example, when a normal symbol (for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, even if the symbol to be derived and displayed is the same normal symbol (“2”), it is a different normal symbol (“4”). Also good. Secondly, as a re-lottery effect to promote the jackpot symbol, after stopping and displaying normal symbols, short-time symbols and probability variation symbols, such symbols are re-variable and stopped. This is a pattern for deriving and displaying the upper symbol. For example, when the normal symbol ("2") is stopped and displayed, the time-shorter symbol, the probability variable symbol or the probability-variant short symbol that is higher than the normal symbol is derived and displayed, and the time-shorter symbol ("9") is stopped and displayed. When the probability variation symbol or the probability variation symbol is higher than the time symbol, and the probability variation symbol (for example, “5”) is stopped and displayed, the probability variation symbol (for example, “5”) is displayed. 7 ”) is derived and displayed. In this embodiment, the re-lottery effect may be executed twice before and after the start of the big hit game.

  First variation pattern setting process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. A variable pattern of variable display of the first special symbol (corresponding to the variable time here), a plurality of types predetermined according to the value of a random number for determining a variation pattern (one of display random numbers) extracted at the time of start winning. Select from among the fluctuation patterns. Further, information (variation pattern command, that is, variable display pattern command) for instructing a variation pattern is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) according to step S303.

  First special symbol changing process (step S303): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the first variation pattern setting process elapses (the first special symbol process timer set in step S302 times out, that is, the value of the first special symbol process timer becomes 0), the internal state The (first special symbol process flag) is updated to step S304 (4 in this example) or a value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). If it is determined that the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the value is updated according to step S305. If it is determined that the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, step S304 is performed. Is updated to a value corresponding to (4 in this example).

  First off symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is stopped and the stop symbol is displayed. In addition, control is performed to transmit to the production control microcomputer 100 on the production control board 80 an production control command (first decoration design stop designation command) indicating stop of the variation of the first design. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) according to step S300.

  First big hit symbol stop process (step S305): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. The variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is stopped and the stop symbol is displayed. In addition, control is performed to transmit an effect control command (first decorative symbol stop command) indicating the stop of the variation of the first decorative symbol to the microcomputer 100 for the effect control. When a predetermined jackpot symbol display period elapses, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) according to step S306. When the presentation control microcomputer 100 receives the presentation control command (first decoration symbol stop designation command) indicating the stop of the variation of the first decoration symbol transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560, the first variable display portion 9a. The first decorative design is controlled so as to be stopped. However, the variable display of the first decorative design may be independently stopped when the variation time elapses. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 displays the jackpot symbol as the background symbol during the jackpot symbol display period.

  First jackpot display process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. The predetermined period is measured, and when the predetermined period elapses, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) according to step S307. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 performs display for notifying the occurrence of the big hit on the background symbol display unit 9c in a predetermined period.

  First big winning opening opening pre-process (step S307): This is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. In the first grand prize opening opening pre-processing, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball apparatus to open the big prize opening. To do. Also, the execution time of the first big prize opening opening process is set by the process timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) according to step S308. The first big winning opening release pre-processing is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the first big winning opening opening pre-processing is also a process for starting a big hit game. In other words, the game control microcomputer 560 realizes the specific game state transition control means by executing the first grand prize opening pre-processing. The specific game state transition control means may be defined to be realized by the game control microcomputer 560 executing the first jackpot display process. That is, the time point when the specific gaming state is started may be the time point when the effect for notifying the occurrence of the big hit is started. In this case, the specific time from the time point when the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result on the second variable display portion corresponds to a period during which the jackpot symbol is displayed.

  First big prize opening opening process (step S308): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. A control for sending a presentation control command for a round display during the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for the presentation control, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S307. When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) according to step S309.

  First big hit end process (step S309): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 9. Control for causing the production control microcomputer 100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) according to step S300.

  Next, a method for sending a control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram showing a signal line of an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 26, in this embodiment, the effect control command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 using eight signal lines of the effect control signals D0 to D7. Further, between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80, a signal line of the effect control INT signal for transmitting the capture signal (effect control INT signal) is also wired.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process. Therefore, when viewed from the effect control microcomputer 100, the effect control INT signal corresponds to a signal that triggers the capture of effect control command data.

  The effect control command is sent only once so that the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize it. In this example, “recognizable” means that the level of the effect control INT signal changes, and that it is sent only once so as to be recognizable means that, for example, each of the first and second bytes of the effect control command data Accordingly, the production control INT signal is output in a pulse shape (rectangular wave shape) only once. The effect control INT signal may have a polarity opposite to that shown in FIG.

  FIG. 28 and FIG. 29 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 100. In the example shown in FIG. 28, commands 8000 (H) to 8018 (H) and 8021 (H) to 8034 (H) correspond to the first variable display portion 9a or the second variable display portion corresponding to the variable symbol special display. This is an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of a decorative symbol variably displayed in 9b. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8018 (H) and 8021 (H) to 8034 (H), the first variable display unit 9a or the second variable display unit 9b. Control to start the variable display of the decorative pattern at. The first change pattern # 1 to # 8 and # 11 to # 14 designation commands (first change pattern commands) are 8001 (H) to 8008 (H), 8021 (H) to 8024 (H), The commands (second variation pattern commands) designated by the second variation patterns # 1 to # 8 and # 11 to # 14 are 8011 (H) to 8018 (H) and 8031 (H) to 8034 (H).

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (probability variable big hit designation command) that designates that the display result of variable display of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol or second decorative symbol) designated by the variation pattern command is a probable big hit. It is. A command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (time / time / hit hit designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is to be a time / hit / hit. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (probability change short / big hit designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is the short change big hit at the probability change. A command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (normal jackpot designation command) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (offset specifying command) that specifies that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols specified by the variation pattern command is to be lost.

  Hereinafter, the probable change jackpot designation command, the hourly and jackpot designation command, the probability change jackpot designation command, the normal jackpot designation command, and the off-line designation command may be referred to as display result commands. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the display result command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display result command received by the game control microcomputer 560 immediately before the first variation pattern command is Since it can be determined that the display result command is for the first decorative pattern, and the display result command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result command for the second decorative pattern, the display result command is Although one decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be used together, the display result command for the first decorative symbol may be different from the display result command for the second decorative symbol.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 does not transmit a display result command, but instead determines a variation pattern command corresponding to each of probability change big hit / time short hit big hit / probable change short hit big hit / normal big hit / displacement, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

  Command 9006 (H) designates that the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols is usually a big win, and an effect control command (re-lottery) that designates that a re-lottery effect is executed after the end of 15 rounds of big hit game With normal jackpot designation command). Command 9007 (H) designates that the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols is a short-time symbol, and an effect control command (re-lottery) that designates that a re-lottery effect is to be executed after the end of 15 rounds of big hit game Command). Command 9008 (H) designates that the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols is a probability variation symbol, and an effect control command (re-lottery) that designates that a re-lottery effect is to be executed after the end of 15 rounds of big hit game Command). The command 9009 (H) specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a short-time symbol of the probable change, and an effect control command (re-execution) that specifies that a re-lottery effect is to be executed after the end of 15 rounds of the big hit game. Command with a chance to win a short break with lottery).

  Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first decorative symbol stop designation command) for instructing stop of variable display of the first decorative symbol. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second decoration symbol stop designation command) for instructing stop of variable display of the second decoration symbol.

  The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (first interruption designation command) for instructing to interrupt the variable display of decorative symbols on the first variable display section 9a, and the command A101 (H) is the first variable display section 9a. Is an effect control command (first restart designation command) for instructing to resume the variable display of decorative symbols.

  The command A200 (H) is an effect control command (second interruption designation command) for instructing interruption of variable display of decorative symbols in the second variable display portion 9b, and the command A201 (H) is specified in the second variable display portion 9b. Is an effect control command (second resume designation command) for instructing to resume the variable display of decorative symbols.

  Command BXXX (H) (X = any hexadecimal number) is an effect control command that is sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first big hit start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first big hit game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) that designates the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) that designates the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) that designates the end of the second jackpot game.

  The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big prize opening) that designates display during the round during the big hit game. Note that the number of rounds displayed in “XX” is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (count number designation command) that designates the number of winning balls (the number of winning detections of the count switch 23) to the big prize opening during each round. The number of winning balls (count number) is set in “XX”. The command B3XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big prize opening) that specifies display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached four. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached four. The command C100 (H) indicates that a game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 in a state where the first reserved memory number is 4, or a second start winning opening 14 in the state where the second reserved memory number is 4. Is an effect control command (invalid start winning designation command) indicating that the game ball has won. In this embodiment, a command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first effective start winning designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second effective start winning specified command. The first valid start winning designation command and the second valid start winning designation command are commands indicating that there has been a start winning.

  Command D000 (H) is an effect control command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Command E000 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state designation command) transmitted when the gaming state shifts to a probability change state (high probability state). Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (time reduction state designation command) transmitted when the gaming state shifts to the time reduction state. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) transmitted when the gaming state shifts to a normal state (a state that is neither a probability change state nor a short time state).

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the first variable display portion 9a and the second variable display portion 9b and the display state of the background symbol display portion 9c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, and the display state of the lamp is changed. The sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. It should be noted that effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, a more detailed presentation control command related to the big hit game and a presentation control command indicating a gaming state (for example, a presentation control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the presentation control board 80.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process in step S312. In the first start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first reserved memory number is 4 which is the upper limit value (step S321). If the first reserved memory number is 4, control is performed to transmit an invalid start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S325). When transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, specifically, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28).

  If the first reserved memory number is not 4, the value of the first reserved memory number counter indicating the first reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (step S322). Also, software random numbers (counter values for generating jackpot determination random numbers, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted random numbers are stored in the storage area in the reserved storage buffer corresponding to the value of the first reserved memory number counter. The storing process is executed (step S323). In the reserved storage buffer, the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number are secured. Further, a counter for generating a jackpot determining random number and the like and a holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM. In step S322, random values 1 to 5, 9 (see FIG. 6) are extracted and stored in the storage area. Further, control is performed to transmit the first effective start winning command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S324).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S300) in the first special symbol process. The state where the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300 is a state in which the first special symbol indicator 8a does not display the variation of the first special symbol, and This is a case where the first big hit game is not in progress (the big prize opening is opened a predetermined number of times).

  In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 560 can start changing the first special symbol (for example, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300). ) (Step S51), the value of the first reserved storage number is confirmed (step S52). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is confirmed.

  If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55 Are stored in the first random number buffer area (step S53), the value of the first reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S54). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 is expressed as the first reserved memory number = n−. 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers are extracted always coincides with the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like that. That is, in this example, every time the variable display start condition is satisfied, the contents of each storage area are shifted, so the order in which the random number values are extracted can be specified. In this example, each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are: The order of extraction is also stored in an identifiable manner.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 subtracts 1 if the time-count counter is not 0 when the game state is the probability change time-short state (step S55) (step S56). If the gaming state is not the probability change time short state, the process proceeds to step S57. The gaming state is determined by state data described later.

  Next, when the gaming state is the probability changing state or the probability changing time short state (step S57), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to end the probability changing before executing the big hit determination of steps S64 and S65. The determination is made by lottery (steps S58 to S59). If the gaming state is not a probable change state, the process proceeds to step S64. In this example, the determination of whether or not to end the probability change is performed every time the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). That is, for example, when lottery determination is performed every five times, after shifting to the probability variation state, the lottery is performed when variable display of the fifth, tenth, fifteenth,. Determination (processing of steps S58 to S59) is executed.

  If it is in the probability change state (step S57), the game control microcomputer 560 reads the random number for lottery determination (random number for probability change end determination: random 9) from the storage area (step S58), It is determined whether or not the value matches a probability variation end value that is a determination value for determining the end of the probability variation state (step S59). The time-short state is included) is terminated (step S60).

  If the time-count counter is not 0 (step S61), the gaming state is shifted to the time-saving state. Therefore, the time-short state designation effect control command (time-saving) indicating that the gaming state has become the time-saving state. Control to transmit the state designation command) to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S62). Specifically, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the short time state designation command is set in the pointer. When the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the time reduction state designation command is set to the pointer, the time reduction state designation command is transmitted in the decorative design command control process (step S27). Hereinafter, “transmit an effect control command” indicates that such processing is performed. Note that the command transmission table is an area of the ROM 54 where the effect control commands exemplified in FIGS. 28 and 29 are set. The pointer is data used for designating an address where the corresponding command is stored in the area, and is formed in the RAM 55.

  Note that, based on the fact that the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the time reduction state designation command is set in the pointer, it is not limited to the configuration for transmitting the time reduction state designation command in the decorative symbol command control process (step S27). In the process of step S62, a configuration may be used in which a loss designation command is transmitted. The same applies to the following command transmission processing.

  In addition, if the time-count counter is 0 (note that the value of the time-count counter is 0 even when it is just a probability change state that is not a probability change time short state), if the state data indicates a time reduction state, that state. The data is changed to a non-time-short state (step S63).

  Therefore, when the probability variation state ends based on the value of random 9, the lottery based on the low probability state is executed in the jackpot determination in step S65.

  On the other hand, if the random 9 value read in step S58 does not match the probability variation end value (step S59), the process proceeds to step S63a.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the second big hit flag is set (step S63a). If the second jackpot flag is set, the first forced miss flag indicating that the display result of the first special symbol display 8a is determined to be forced miss is set (step S63b), and the process proceeds to step S68. To do. That is, since it has already been determined that the display result of the second special symbol display 8b is a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 does not perform the jackpot determination process in steps S65 and S66, and the first bonus is unconditionally. 1 It is determined that the display result of the special symbol display 8a is to be an off symbol.

  Note that the second big hit flag is set when it is determined to be a big hit in the second special symbol process. Further, the second big hit flag is reset when, for example, the variation of the second special symbol is finished (or is reset when the big hit game is finished). That is, the fact that the second jackpot flag is set means that it has been determined that the display result of the second variable display device 9b is a jackpot symbol. Accordingly, the fact that the second jackpot flag is set means that the second variable display device 9b performs the variation of the second decorative symbol based on the determination that the display result of the second variable display device 9b is the jackpot symbol. (However, if the game is reset when the jackpot game ends, it means that the change is being executed or that the jackpot game is being executed).

  If the second jackpot flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step S64), and executes the jackpot determination module (step S65). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when the jackpot determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S66), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a first big hit flag (step S67). The “first big hit flag” is referred to in the determination in step S1102, which will be described later.

  Then, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S68).

  In step S65, whether or not the control state is a probability change state is taken into consideration, and the determination is made based on the jackpot probability at the time of probability change or the jackpot probability at the time of non-probability change. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the control state indicated by the state data is a probabilistic state. If it is a probabilistic state, the determination is made with the big hit probability at the time of the probabilistic change. Do.

  In this example, the determination as to whether or not to end the probability change is made by lottery, but the determination as to whether or not to end the probability change may not be performed. That is, the probability change state may not be terminated by puncture. In this case, steps S57 to S63 may not be executed in the first special symbol normal process described above.

  32 and 33 are flowcharts showing the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S301) in the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step S1102). If the first jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1102), the game control microcomputer 560 reads the random symbol for random symbol determination (random 3) from the first random number storage buffer, and reads the random symbol for random symbol determination. In accordance with the random number, the first special symbol display symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 8a is determined (step S1103).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to transmit a loss designation command (9004 (H)) for designating that the display result of the first variable display section 9a is a loss to the effect control microcomputer 100 ( Step S1104).

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S302) (step S1132).

  When the first jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1102), the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 8a as the jackpot symbol ("7"). At the same time, the big hit type determining random number (random 4) is read from the first random number storage buffer, and the big hit type is determined according to the read big hit type determining random number (step S1105). Here, as the types of big hits, normal big hits that do not execute the re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit game, hourly big hits, probable change big hits, and short-hits during the probable change, normal big hits that execute the re-lottery effect after the big hit game ends, short-term big hits, positive change There are big hits and short hits when probability changes.

  For example, when the random number value is 0 to 2, it is determined as a normal jackpot that does not execute the re-lottery effect, when the random value is 3, it is determined as the normal jackpot that executes the re-lottery effect. When the lottery effect is not executed, it is determined that it is a short and big hit, and when the random number is 5, it is determined that the re-lottery effect is executed. Further, when the random number value is 6, it is determined to be a promiscuous big hit that does not execute the re-lottery effect, and when the random value is 7 or 8, it is determined to be a probable big hit that executes the re-lottery effect. Further, when the random number value is 9, it is determined that the probability change time big hit is not executed, and when the random number is 10, 11, it is determined that the probability change time big hit is executed.

  When it is determined that the big hit is normally made (Y in step S1106), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed after the big hit game is over (step S1107). A normal jackpot designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1108). When the re-lottery effect is executed, a normal jackpot designation command with a re-lottery is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1109). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a re-lottery execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed after the end of the big hit game (step S1110), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first variation pattern setting. The value indicating the process (step S302) is updated (step S1132).

  If it is determined that the time-hit jackpot is reached (Y in step S1111), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a time-hit jackpot flag indicating that the time-hit jackpot has been reached (step S1112), and then restarts after the big-hit game is over. It is confirmed whether or not a lottery effect is executed (step S1113). When the re-lottery effect is not executed, a time and bonus winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1114). When the re-lottery effect is executed, a short and large bonus hit designation command with a re-lottery is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1115). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a re-lottery execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed after the end of the big hit game (step S1116), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first variation pattern setting. The value indicating the process (step S302) is updated (step S1132).

  If it is determined that the probability variation big hit is made (Y in step S1117), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a probability variation big hit flag indicating that the probability variation big hit has been reached (step S1118), and again after the big hit game ends. It is confirmed whether or not to execute a lottery effect (step S1119). When the re-lottery effect is not executed, a probability variation jackpot designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1120). When executing the re-lottery effect, a probable big hit designation command with re-lottery is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1121). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a re-lottery execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed after the end of the big hit game (step S1122), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first variation pattern setting. The value indicating the process (step S302) is updated (step S1132).

  If it is determined in step S117 that the probability change big hit is not made, the game control microcomputer 560 decides to make the probability change big hit. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a probability variation big hit flag indicating that the probability variation big hit has been reached and a time short / hit big hit flag indicating that the hour / short big hit has been reached (steps S1124 and S1125), and after the big hit game has ended. It is confirmed whether or not a re-lottery effect is executed (step S1126). When the re-lottery effect is not executed, a probability change time big hit designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). When executing the re-lottery effect, a command for specifying a change in probability with a re-lottery is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1128). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets a re-lottery execution flag indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed after the end of the big hit game (step S1129), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first variation pattern setting. The value indicating the process (step S302) is updated (step S1132).

  In this embodiment, as described above, as the types of big hits, the normal big hit, the time short hit, the probability variation big hit, and the probability change big hit are provided. However, it is possible not to distinguish the probability variation big hit from the probability variation big and short big hit. In other words, when the probability variation big hit is always in the probability variation state and the time shortening state, the big hit types may be three types of normal big hit, short time big hit and probability variation big hit. Also, the types of big hits may be two types of normal big hits and probability variation big hits, or two types of normal big hits and short-time big hits.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S302) in the first special symbol process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not the value of the total pending storage number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (4 in this example) (step S200A). When the value of the total pending storage number counter is 4 or more, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the first variation pattern # 5 having a variation time of 5 seconds (that is, a variation time of the shortened variation) ( Step S200B) and the process proceeds to Step S203.

  If the value of the total pending storage number counter is not 4 or more, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the first forced failure flag is set (step S201), and the first forced failure flag is set. If not, the game control microcomputer 560 selects a variation pattern table (a normal / probability variation pattern table or a short-time variation pattern table) based on the state data and the set state of the first jackpot flag (step S202a). ). If the first forced miss flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 selects the forced missed variation pattern table (see FIG. 10) (step S202b).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the state data is in the time-short state (step S203). ). When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0 (step S205), the state data is changed from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state (step S206).

  Next, when the state data indicates the probability change state, the time reduction state, or the probability change time reduction state (step S207), the game control microcomputer 560 displays the current variable display result as a normal big hit (non-probability and non-change). Short-term big hit: If it is a big hit that satisfies the end condition of the probability change state or the time-short state (step S208), the state data is changed to the non-probable change / non-time-short state (step S209).

  In addition, when the state data indicates the probability change state, the time reduction state, or the probability change time reduction state (step S209), the game control microcomputer 560 displays the current variable display result as the time reduction big hit (non-probability and time reduction big hit). : If it is in the probable state, the end condition is satisfied and the time is changed to the short time state, and if it is in the short time state, the control state is maintained (big hit that will maintain the control state) (step S210) In addition to changing to the state, an initial value (for example, “100”) is set in the time reduction counter (step S211).

  As described above, in this example, when a time-short hit occurs in the probability variation state, the state data is changed from the probability variation state to the time-short state before the variable display in which the display result becomes the time-short symbol is started. At the same time, an initial value is set in the time-count counter. In addition, when a time and big hit occurs when the probability change time is short, the state data is changed from the probability change state to the time reduction state before the variable display in which the display result becomes a time reduction symbol is started. The initial value is set in the counter. In addition, if a time and big hit occurs in the time-short state, the initial value is set in the time-count counter without changing the state data before starting the variable display where the display result becomes the time-short symbol. The

  As described above, when the time and big hit occurs in the probability variation state, the state data is changed from the probability variation state to the time reduction state before the variable display in which the display result becomes the time reduction symbol is started. Since the initial value is set in the counter, after the variable display in which the display result is a short-time symbol is started, the big hit determination process in the other special symbol (for example, the process corresponding to step S65 in the second special symbol) , It is possible to make a judgment with a low probability jackpot judgment probability in the short-time state instead of a high probability jackpot judgment probability in the probabilistic state, and after the variable display in which the display result becomes a short-time symbol is started. When the special symbol fluctuation display is executed, the change in the time reduction state is subtracted by subtracting the time reduction set in the time reduction counter. It is possible to count the number of times.

  If the display result of this variable display is a probabilistic big hit (probable and non-temporal big hit) when the status data indicates the time-short state (non-probable and time-short state), the display result will be a probabilistic symbol. The state data may be changed from the short-time state to the probabilistic state before the variable display is started, or the state data is changed from the short-time state to the probabilistic state after the display result of the variable display that becomes the probable variable pattern is derived and displayed. You may make it change to.

  In addition, if the display result of the current variable display is a short hit for the probable change when the status data indicates the time-short state (non-probable and time-short state), the variable display is started so that the display result becomes the short-term symbol for the probable change. The state data may be changed from the short-time state to the probable change time-short state before the change is made, or the state data is changed from the short-time state to the probable-change time-short state after the display result of the fluctuation display as the probability change symbol is derived and displayed. You may do it.

  In addition, when the status data shows the probability variation state (probability and non-time-short state), if the display result of this variable display is the probability change time-short hit, the variable display that the display result becomes the probability variation time-short symbol is started. The state data may be changed from the probabilistic state to the probable change time short state before the change is made, or the state data is changed from the probabilistic state to the probable change time short state after the display result of the fluctuation display as the probability change symbol is derived and displayed. You may do it.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps S202a and S202b, and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5) stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 is to be used (step S212). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. If the first variation pattern # 5 of the shortening variation has already been determined in step S200B, the game control microcomputer 560 does not perform step S212. Further, after the variation time is determined, a variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

  In step S212, it is confirmed whether or not the second big hit variation flag is set, and if it is set, the variation in which the notice effect is performed except when the variation display result of the first special symbol this time is a big hit. It may be determined to be a pattern.

  When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S213).

  When the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S212, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first special symbol process timer to vary. Time measurement is started (step S214), a measurement execution flag to be described later is set, and the first special symbol display on the first special symbol display 8a is started to be displayed (step S215). Furthermore, when the variable display result of the first special symbol that has been started becomes the big hit display result (step S216), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the first big hit fluctuation flag (step S217). The first jackpot variation flag is a flag indicating whether or not variable display in which the variation display result becomes the jackpot display result is executed by the first special symbol. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol changing process (step S218).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the process of the first special symbol changing process (step S303) in the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to any one of the second big hit symbol stop process to the second big hit symbol stop process (however, the second offset symbol stop process is excluded). If the value is in accordance, the process ends (step S121a). That is, when the second jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and from when the jackpot game corresponding to the stop display of the second jackpot symbol is started until the end notification is made (for example, the second big prize opening opening process) And during the execution of the second big hit end process), the process after step S121 is not executed, and the measurement of the variation time using the first variation time timer is interrupted.

  When the value of the second special symbol process flag is not a value corresponding to any of the second big hit symbol stop process to the second big hit symbol stop process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the first variation time timer (step S121). When the first variable time timer times out (step S122), if the first jackpot flag is set, a value corresponding to the jackpot symbol display time is set in the first jackpot symbol display time timer (step S123). , S124), the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first big hit symbol stop process (step S305) (step S125). If the first big hit flag is not set, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first off symbol stop process (step S304) (step S126). If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the process is terminated as it is.

  FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the process of the first off symbol stop process (step S304) in the first special symbol process. In the first off symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets, for example, an end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S32 to end the variation of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a has a shift symbol. Is controlled to be derived and displayed (step S161). In addition, control for transmitting the first design symbol stop designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S162). In step S170, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S300).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the first big hit symbol stop process (step S305) in the first special symbol process. In the first big hit symbol stop process, if the CPU 56 has already executed the control to transmit the first decorative symbol stop designation command, the CPU 1 decrements the first big hit symbol display time timer and sets the first big hit symbol display time. When the timer has timed out (= 0), the process proceeds to step S183 (steps S180A, S180B, S180C). When the control for transmitting the first design symbol stop designation command is not executed (step S180A), the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of step S32 is set to end the variation of the first special symbol. Then, control for deriving and displaying the big hit symbol on the first special symbol indicator 8a is performed (step S181). Further, control for transmitting the first decorative symbol stop designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S182). Then, the process proceeds to step S180B.

  In step S183, the CPU 56 specifies a first jackpot start designation command (fanfare designation) for designating to start the 15th round jackpot (execution of the 15th round jackpot fanfare effect) to the effect control microcomputer 100. A command (B000 (H)) is transmitted and a value corresponding to a big hit display time (time for notifying the occurrence of a big hit in the background symbol display unit 9c, for example) is set in the first big hit display time timer. Then, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first jackpot display process (step S306) (step S185).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the first big hit display process (step S306) in the first special symbol process. In the first jackpot display process, the CPU 56 decrements the first jackpot display time timer (step S187), and when the value of the first jackpot display time timer becomes 0 (step S188), the first special symbol process flag is set. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the first big prize opening pre-processing (step S307) (step S189).

  The time when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first jackpot display processing by the first jackpot display processing as described above is a predetermined time according to the value set in step S184 (for example, 1.0 second). Also, when the second special symbol process is executed, the time during which the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second jackpot display processing is a predetermined time (for example, 1.0 second). )continue.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S307) in the first special symbol process. In the pre-opening process for the first big prize opening, the game control microcomputer 560 normally has the big hit flag set and the probability variation flag is set (when the probability variation state is a big hit with a non-probable variation symbol). Resets the probability variation flag (step S400). If the probability variation flag is set, the probability variation flag may be always reset. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the prize winning control timer by −1 (step S401). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S402). If the value is not 0 (N in step S402), the process is ended as it is.

  If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S402), the game control microcomputer 560 designates a display state corresponding to the number of rounds when the big prize opening is open (during the round). Control is performed to transmit the display command (B1XX (H)) during opening of the big prize opening to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S404). The number of rounds is recognized by checking the value of a round number counter that counts the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to open the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) by driving the solenoid 21 (step S405) and increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (step S406). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. In step S405, the game control microcomputer 560 turns on / off the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port. The content related to off is set according to the open / close state of the solenoid to be driven. Then, the contents set in the RAM area of the output port in the solenoid output process of step S33 are output to the output port. As a result, a drive command signal is output from the output port to the solenoid circuit 59. The solenoid circuit 59 outputs a drive signal for driving the solenoid in response to a drive command signal to drive the solenoid. Hereinafter, in the process of opening and closing the solenoid, such an operation is performed.

  In addition, the maximum time (15th round time) for which the big prize opening can be opened in each round in the big hit of 15 rounds is set in the big prize opening control timer (step S407). The round time for 15 rounds is, for example, 29.5 seconds. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to the first big prize opening opening process (step S411).

  FIG. 40 and FIG. 41 are flowcharts showing the first big prize opening opening process (step S308) in the first special symbol process. In the first big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step S421).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (step S431). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S431), it is checked whether or not the game ball has won the big prize opening by checking whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on. Confirmation is made (step S432). If the count switch 23 is not turned on (N in step S432), the process is terminated as it is. If the count switch 23 is ON (Y in step S432), the game control microcomputer 560 increments the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening (step S433). Then, control is performed to transmit a count number designation command (B2XX (H)) for designating the number of winning balls to the big winning opening during the round to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S434). Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S435). If the value of the winning number counter is not the predetermined number (N in step S435), the process is terminated as it is.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S431) or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S435), the game control microcomputer 560 is Then, the solenoid 21 is driven to perform control for closing the special winning opening (opening / closing plate 20) (step S436). Then, the value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (step S437).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 15 (step S438). When the value of the round number counter is not 15 (N in step S438), the game control microcomputer 560 specifies the display state corresponding to the number of rounds after the big winning opening is opened (after the end of the round). Control is performed to transmit the display designation command (B3XX (H)) after opening the mouth to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S439). Then, a time (interval time for 15 rounds) from the end of the round to the start of the next round is set in the big winning opening control timer (step S440), and the first special symbol is set. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (preliminary winning opening opening process) (step S441). The interval time for 15 rounds is, for example, 5 seconds.

  When the value of the round number counter is 15 (Y in step S438), the game control microcomputer 560 specifies an effect control command (first big hit end designation command; first ending designation) that designates the end of the first big hit game. Control is performed to transmit the command (B001 (H)) to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S443).

  For example, when the probability variable big hit flag is not set, but the hour / short big hit flag is set and the re-lottery execution flag is not set, the end of the hour / short big hit is displayed (notified) without executing the re-lottery effect. Controls transmission of the specified ending command. In addition, when the probability variation big hit is set, the hour / short big hit flag is set, and the re-lottery execution flag is also set, the end indicating that the end of the probable time short-hit is displayed (notified) after the re-lottery effect is executed Controls sending commands.

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the big hit end time in the big prize opening control timer (step S444), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to step S309 (first big hit end processing). Update (step S445).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the first big hit end process (step S309) in the first special symbol process. In the first jackpot ending process, the game control microcomputer 560 first decrements the value of the big prize opening control timer by -1 (step S451). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer is 0 (step S452). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S452), the process is ended as it is.

  If the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S452), the game control microcomputer 560 recognizes the set state of the probability variable big hit flag and the short time big hit flag, so that the big hit becomes the short hit big at the probability change. (Step S453). If it is a short hit at the time of probability change (Y in step S453), the state data is changed to the short state at time of probability change (step S454), and a predetermined value is set in the time count counter (step S455). In this embodiment, 100 is set in the time reduction counter. The game control microcomputer 560 performs control to transmit a probability change state designation command (E000 (H)) for designating that the game state is a probability change state to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S456).

  If it is not a short hit at probability change, it is confirmed whether it was a big hit at probability (step S457). If it is a probable big hit (Y in step S457), the state data is changed to the probable change state (step S458), and the control for transmitting the probable change state designation command (E000 (H)) to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. This is performed (step S456).

  If it is not a probable big hit, it is checked whether or not it is a time big hit (step S459). If it is a time-saving hit (Y in step S457), the status data is changed to the time-saving state (step S460), and a predetermined value (for example, 100) is set in the time-saving counter (step S461). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to transmit a time-short state designation command (E001 (H)) for designating that the game state is a time-short state to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S462).

  If it was n’t a big hit, it ’s usually a big hit. In this case, since the state data is in the non-probability change / non-time-short state by steps S207 to S209, the game control microcomputer 560 specifies the normal state designation command (E002 ( H)) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S463).

  After the processes of steps S456, S462, and S463, the game control microcomputer 560 resets the first big hit flag (step S464). Then, if the probability variation big hit flag or the short time big hit flag is set, these flags are reset (step S465). If the re-lottery execution flag is set, the re-lottery execution flag is reset (step S466). Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command for designating the end of jackpot to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S467).

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the internal state (the value of the special symbol process flag) to a value corresponding to step S300 (special symbol normal process) (step S468).

  In this embodiment, 100 is set in the time reduction counter, but the time reduction number may be another number (for example, 50 times, 120 times, etc.). In addition, the number of hours and hours may be selected from a plurality of types of times (for example, 20 times, 50 times, and 100 times). In this case, the number of times selected by lottery is set in the time and number of times counter. Is done. The selection by lottery here is, for example, extracting a random number for determining the number of times for a short time, and using a table for determining the number of times for a short time in which the extracted value and the number of times are associated with each other. What is necessary is just to make it perform by performing the process which selects the frequency | count.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram of an example of state data. As shown in FIG. 43, the status data is composed of 2 bits, used as a probability change flag indicating whether or not bit 0 is in a probability change state, and as a time reduction flag indicating whether or not bit 1 is in a time reduction state. Used. In this example, when bit 0 (probability change flag) is “0”, it means a non-probability change state, and when it is “1”, it means a probability change state. When bit 1 (time reduction flag) is “0”, it means a non-time reduction state, and when it is “1”, it means a time reduction state. That is, when both the bit 0 and the bit 1 in the state data are “1”, it means that the probability change time short state is established. Therefore, in this example, “change the gaming state indicated by the state data” means that the value of each bit constituting the state data is changed.

  Next, the transmission timing of each effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described.

  FIG. 44 is a timing diagram showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when the 15-round jackpot game is executed. As shown in FIG. 44, every time the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display and there is a start winning, the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S301). ) Or in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, a symbol / effect designation command corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot determination and the determination result of the jackpot type is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Specifically, when the determination result of the big hit determination is “missing”, a missing designation command is transmitted. When the determination result of the big hit determination is “big hit”, the normal big hit designation command is transmitted when the big hit type is “normal big hit” and the re-lottery effect is not executed. When the big hit type is “normal big hit” and the re-lottery effect is executed, a normal big hit designation command with a re-lottery is transmitted.

  When the big hit type is “time and big jackpot” and the re-lottery effect is not executed, a time and jackpot designation command is transmitted. In addition, when the big hit type is “time and big big hit” and the re-lottery effect is to be executed, a time and big hit special command with re-lottery is transmitted. When the big hit type is “probable big hit” and the re-lottery effect is not executed, a probable big hit designation command is transmitted. When the big hit type is “probable big hit” and a re-lottery effect is executed, a probable big hit designation command with a re-lottery is transmitted.

  If the big hit type is “short-term big hit at probability change” and the re-lottery effect is not executed, a short-term big hit designation command at probability change is transmitted. Also, when the big hit type is “probable change short / big hit” and the re-lottery effect is executed, a probable change short / long big hit designation command with re-lottery is transmitted.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 selects the stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the first variable display portion 9a or the second variable display portion 9b based on the symbol / effect designation command from the game control microcomputer 560. .

  Then, in the variation pattern setting process (step S302), a variation pattern (variation time) of the decorative symbol is determined using a predetermined variation pattern table, and a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern is displayed in the effect control microcomputer 100. Sent to.

  In response to the reception of the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560, the performance control microcomputer 100 starts the variation (variable display) of the decorative symbols in the first variable display portion 9a or the second variable display portion 9b. . As described above, the variation of the decorative symbol on the first variable display portion 9a or the second variable display portion 9b is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. . In addition, when the variation pattern includes “re-lottery effect”, the re-lottery effect is performed in the first variable display portion 9a or the second variable display portion 9b before the start of the big hit game as part of the variation of the decorative design. Executed.

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 measures the variation time of the special symbol in the first special symbol changing process (step S303) or the second special symbol changing process, and also uses the first special symbol display unit 8a or the second special symbol display unit 8a. 2 Control of variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display 8b. When the decorative symbol variation time has elapsed, in the first special symbol stop process (step S304), the first big hit symbol stop process (step S305), the second special symbol stop process or the second big hit symbol stop process, the first special symbol The special symbol change in the display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped, and a decorative symbol stop designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. When the determination result in the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a fanfare command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In response to the reception of the fanfare command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 starts a big hit of 15 rounds using effect devices such as the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, and the lamps 28a to 28c. A fanfare effect for informing the player of this fact is executed for a predetermined period. For example, the background symbol display unit 9c displays a jackpot symbol of the background symbol (such as “222” or “777”) and a character indicating that it has been a jackpot (“big hit!”) Or the like. Further, a sound effect when the big hit is made from the speaker 27 is emitted, or the lamps 28a to 28c and the like are turned on in a lighting pattern when the big hit.

  Thereafter, in the game control microcomputer 560, in the first big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S307), the big hit display time (the time from when the big hit symbol is stopped to the start of the first round of big hit) is measured. To start. When the big hit display time has elapsed, when a big hit of 15 rounds is started, a display command during the big prize opening opening is transmitted to the microcomputer 100 for effect control. The display state of the background symbol display portion 9c during each round is designated by the display command for opening the big prize opening. Further, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. As a result, the first round in the big hit game starts.

  The presentation control microcomputer 100 uses the presentation device such as the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, and the lamps 28 a to 28 c in response to reception of the display command for opening the big prize opening from the gaming control microcomputer 560. A round effect (round display) for notifying the player that the current round is in progress is executed. For example, the background symbol display unit 9c displays a jackpot symbol (such as “222” or “777”) of the background symbol, and displays a character indicating the current round (“first round”), other characters, and the like. Further, a sound effect during the round is emitted from the speaker 27, and the lamps 28a to 28c and the like are lit in the lighting pattern during the round.

  Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 starts measurement of the round time for 15 rounds in the first grand prize opening opening process (step S308) or the second big prize opening opening process. Further, every time the count switch 23 is detected to be turned on, the value of the winning number counter is incremented by 1, thereby counting the number of winning balls to the big winning opening. Also, a count number designation command for designating the count number is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  When the round time elapses or when the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number, the solenoid 21 is driven to close the large winning opening. Thus, the first round during the big hit game is completed. At this time, since the number of rounds is not 15, a display command after opening the big prize opening is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  The production control microcomputer 100 uses the production devices such as the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, and the lamps 28 a to 28 c in response to reception of the display command after the special winning opening is opened from the game control microcomputer 560. An interval effect (interval display) for notifying the player that the interval is within a predetermined period is executed.

  After that, the game control microcomputer 560 starts measuring the interval time (the time from the end of the round to the start of the next round) in the first grand prize opening pre-processing (step S307). When the interval time elapses, a display command for opening the special winning opening is transmitted to the microcomputer 100 for effect control. Further, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening.

  The process for opening the first grand prize opening and the process for opening the first big prize opening as described above are repeatedly executed until the 15th round is completed. In the first big prize opening opening process, when the value of the round number counter becomes 15, an ending command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In response to the reception of the ending command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the effect display devices such as the variable display device 9, the speaker 27, and the lamps 28a to 28c to end the big hit. An ending effect (a jackpot end display) to notify the person is executed for a predetermined period. For example, a character indicating the end of a big hit (“See you!”) Or the like is displayed on the background symbol display portion 9c, a sound effect for the ending effect is sounded from the speaker 27, or the lamps 28a to 28c are used for the ending effect. Or turn on with the lighting pattern. At this time, when the re-lottery effect is specified in the ending command, the re-lottery effect is executed in the background symbol display unit 9c.

  Thereafter, in the game control microcomputer 560, in the first jackpot end process (step S309), measurement of the jackpot end time (the execution time of the ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the jackpot) is started. When the big hit end time elapses, processing for setting / resetting predetermined flags (big hit flag, probability variable big hit flag, re-lottery execution flag) is performed, and a display designation effect control command corresponding to the gaming state after the big hit game ends Is sent. Also, a jackpot end designation command is transmitted. Then, the process returns to the first special symbol normal process (step S300) or the second special symbol normal process again, and the variation of the special symbol is started.

  According to the above configuration, after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the player does not know whether the re-lottery effect of the jackpot symbol is executed before or after the jackpot game is started. Since there is a possibility that the re-lottery effect is executed twice, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the transition to the probability change state over a long period of time.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing a timer for determining the start interval of effect control, and the like (step S701). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the first decorative symbol process (step S705A). In the first decorative symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display portion 9a is executed. . Further, the second decorative symbol process is performed (step S705B). In the second decorative symbol process, a process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 9b is executed. . Further, background symbol process processing for controlling the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c is executed (step S706). In addition, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is executed (step S707). Further, a random number update process for updating a counter value of a counter for generating a random number such as a notice determination random number is executed (step S708). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 28 and 29) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  46 to 48 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing (step S704) in the main processing. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S1611). If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control microcomputer 100 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S1612).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (displacement designation command: 9004 (H)) that designates that the display results of the variable display portions 9a and 9b are out of place (step S1613), the effect control microcomputer 100 extracts a decorative design determination random number (step S1614), and determines a stop design of the decorative design corresponding to the loss based on the extracted decorative design determination random number (step S1615). Then, the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol is stored in the decorative symbol storage area in the RAM (step S1616).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (ordinary jackpot designation command: 9003 (H)) that designates that the display result of the variable display portions 9a and 9b is a normal jackpot (step S1617) The control microcomputer 100 sets a normal big hit effect flag indicating that the normal big hit is designated (step S1618), and after the big hit indicating that the re-lottery effect is not executed in the ending effect after the big hit ends. A re-lottery non-execution flag is set (step S1619).

  Further, if the received effect control command is an effect control command (time / time / hit hit designation command: 9001 (H)) that designates that the display result of the variable display portions 9a and 9b is a time / hit / hit (step S1620) The control microcomputer 100 sets a time-hit jackpot effect flag indicating that the time-hit jackpot has been designated (step S1621), and after the jackpot end indicating that the re-lottery effect is not executed in the ending effect after the jackpot end. A re-lottery non-execution flag is set (step S1622).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (probability variable jackpot designation command: 9000 (H)) that designates that the display result of the variable display portions 9a and 9b is a probable big hit (step S1623), the effect The control microcomputer 100 sets a probability variation jackpot effect flag indicating that the probability variation jackpot has been designated (step S1624), and also after the jackpot indicating that the re-lottery effect is not executed in the ending effect after the end of the jackpot. A re-lottery non-execution flag is set (step S1625).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command that specifies that the display result of the variable display portions 9a and 9b is a probability change time big hit (probability change time big hit designation command: 9002 (H)) (step S1626). The effect control microcomputer 100 sets a probability variable big hit effect flag indicating that the probability variable big hit is designated (step S1627), and also sets a time short hit effect flag indicating that the time big hit is designated (step S1628). ). In addition, a re-lottery non-execution flag after the big hit indicating that the re-lottery effect is not executed in the ending effect after the big hit ends is set (step S1629).

  In addition, the received effect control command specifies that the display result of the variable display units 9a and 9b is usually a big hit, and specifies that the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending effect after the big hit game ends. If it is a control command (ordinary jackpot designation command with re-lottery: 9006 (H)) (step S1630), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a normal jackpot presentation flag indicating that the normal jackpot has been designated (step S1630). S1631) Further, a re-lottery execution flag after the big hit indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending effect after the end of the big hit is set (step S1632).

  Further, the received effect control command specifies that the display result of the variable display portions 9a and 9b is a time-hit big hit, and specifies that the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending effect after the big hit game ends. If it is a control command (temporary jackpot designation command with re-lottery: 9007 (H)) (step S1633), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a hourly and big bonus performance flag indicating that the hourly and big bonus is designated (step S1633). In addition, a re-lottery execution flag after the big hit indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending effect after the end of the big hit is set (step S1635).

  The received effect control command specifies that the display result of the variable display units 9a and 9b is a probable big hit, and specifies that the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending effect after the big hit game ends. If it is a control command (probability change jackpot designation command with re-lottery: 9008 (H)) (step S1636), the production control microcomputer 100 sets a probability change jackpot presentation flag indicating that the probability change jackpot has been designated (step S1636). In addition, a re-lottery execution flag after the big hit indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending effect after the end of the big win is set (step S1638).

  In addition, the received effect control command specifies that the display result of the variable display portions 9a and 9b is a chance big hit, and specifies that the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending effect after the big hit game ends. If it is an effect control command (a command for determining the probability change time with re-lottery: 9009 (H)) (step S1639), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a probability change jackpot effect flag indicating that the probability change jackpot has been specified. At the same time (step S1640), a time and big hit effect flag indicating that the time and big hit is designated is set (step S1641). In addition, a re-lottery execution flag after the big hit indicating that the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending effect after the big hit ends is set (step S1642).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (change pattern command: 8000 (H) to 8034 (H)) for designating a change pattern (step S1648), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the command The EXT data is stored in the fluctuation pattern data storage area in the RAM (step S1649), and the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S1650). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the redrawing effect (here, the redrawing effect before the start of the big hit game) is included in the variation pattern (step S1651), and the redrawing effect is included. If so, the temporary stop symbol determining random number is extracted (step S1652), and the temporary stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined based on the extracted temporary stop symbol determining random number value (step S1653). Here, the temporary stop symbol is a symbol (for example, a normal symbol or a short-time symbol) that is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect before the start of the big hit game is executed. As will be described later, in the redrawing effect, after the symbol that has been temporarily stopped is re-varied, the symbol is equivalent to the symbol (the symbol may be the same symbol as the temporary stop symbol or a different symbol) or the symbol that is stopped and displayed Stop and display the upper symbol of the case, and shift to jackpot game. The effect control microcomputer 100 stores the determined temporary stop symbol in the temporary stop symbol storage area in the RAM (step S1654).

  When the redrawing effect is not included in the variation pattern (N in Step S1651), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern at the time of big hit (Step S1655). If it is a variation pattern at the time of jackpot (Y in step S1655), the production control microcomputer 100 extracts a jackpot display symbol determination random number (step S1656), and based on the extracted value of the jackpot display symbol determination random number. The jackpot display symbol corresponding to whether the normal big hit, the short-time big hit, the probable big hit, the short-time big hit for the probable change, or the execution of the re-lottery effect after the big hit game is finished is determined (step S1657).

  Specifically, the microcomputer 100 for effect control confirms whether or not the normal big hit effect flag, the short-time big hit effect flag, or the probability variable big hit effect flag is set, thereby determining whether the big hit is a normal big hit or a short time big hit probable big hit. It recognizes whether or not the probability change hits the junior large. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 recognizes whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending effect after the end of the big hit game by confirming whether or not the re-lottery execution flag after the big hit is set. To do.

  When the normal big hit effect flag is set, it is necessary to determine the normal symbol as the big hit display symbol regardless of whether or not the re-lottery execution flag is set after the big hit. Also, if the hourly / hit bonus game flag is set but the probability variation bonus game flag is not set and the re-lottery execution flag is set after the big hit is finished, the time In order to avoid the probability change big hit or the probability change short and big hit, it is necessary to determine a normal symbol lower than the short time symbol as the big hit display symbol.

  Also, if the probable big hit effect flag is set but the short-and-time big hit effect flag is not set, and the re-lottery execution flag is set after the big hit, the probable big hit effect is executed before the re-lottery effect is executed. In order to avoid short- and big-profits for probability changes, it is necessary to determine a normal symbol or a time-short design that is lower than the probability-variable symbols as the jackpot display symbol. In addition, if the probability variation big hit effect flag is set, the hourly / hit big hit effect flag is also set, and the re-lottery execution flag is set after the big hit ends, the probability change time / hit big hit will be made before the re-lottery effect is executed. In order to avoid this, it is necessary to determine a normal symbol, a short time symbol, or a probable variation symbol that is lower than the probability variation time short symbol as the jackpot display symbol. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of symbols that can be determined as jackpot display symbols as described above, it is conceivable to select a predetermined case using a predetermined method or a random number.

  When the big lottery re-lottery execution flag is not set (that is, when the big lottery end re-lottery non-execution flag is set), it is necessary to determine the symbol according to the set big hit effect flag. is there. For example, if only the hourly / hit / big hit effect flag is set, it is necessary to determine the hour / shorter symbol as the jackpot display symbol. It is necessary to determine the probability variation time-short design.

  Depending on the situation, the jackpot display symbol determination table for the normal jackpot used for determining the normal symbol, the jackpot display symbol determination table for the short and big jackpot used for the short and long jackpot, and the probability variable jackpot A jackpot display symbol determination table for probability variation jackpots used for the above and a jackpot display symbol determination table for probability variation jackpots used for probability variation jackpots are prepared in advance. A plurality of judgment values are assigned to the normal jackpot display symbol determination table in association with each normal symbol, and the jackpot display symbol determination table for a short-time jackpot has a plurality of determination values in association with each short-time symbol. Judgment values are assigned, and the jackpot display symbol determination table for probability variation jackpots is assigned a plurality of judgment values in association with each probability variation symbol. Similarly, the jackpot display symbol determination table for probability variation short-term jackpots Are assigned a plurality of judgment values in association with each probability variation time-short symbol. The effect control microcomputer 100 selects a jackpot display symbol determination table after recognizing which symbol should be determined as the jackpot display symbol. Then, the jackpot display symbol determination random number is extracted, and the symbol associated with the determination value that matches the extracted value of the jackpot display symbol determination random number is determined as the jackpot display symbol.

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 stores the determined jackpot display symbol in the jackpot display symbol storage area in the RAM (step S1658).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command specified by a fanfare (fanfare commands: B000 (H), B002 (H)) (step S1659), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the EXT data of the command. Are stored in the fanfare data storage area in the RAM (step S1660), and a fanfare flag indicating that the fanfare command has been received is set (step S1661).

  If the received effect control command is an ending-designated effect control command (ending command: B001 (H), B003 (H)) (step S1662), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the EXT data of the command. Is stored in the ending data storage area in the RAM (step S1663), and an ending flag indicating that the ending command has been received is set (step S1664).

  If the received command read in step S1612 is another effect control command, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a flag corresponding to the received command (step S1665).

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the first decorative symbol process (step S705A) in the main process shown in FIG. In the first decorative symbol process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S803 in accordance with the value of the first effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. Note that the second decorative symbol process (step S705B) is configured in the same manner as the first decorative symbol process, although the control target is the second variable display unit 9b.

  First variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not it has been confirmed that the first variation pattern designation effect control command (first variation pattern command) has been received by the command reception interrupt process. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not a flag (first fluctuation pattern reception flag) indicating that the first fluctuation pattern command has been received is set. The first variation pattern reception flag is one of first variation patterns # 1 to # 8 and # 11 to # 14 designated by command analysis processing executed by the effect control CPU 101 (8001 (H) to 8008 (H), 8021. (H) to 8024 (H)) is set when it is confirmed that the first variation pattern command has been received. When the first variation pattern command is received, the variation pattern of the first decorative pattern (such as the variation speed of the decorative symbol during the variation period) is selected from a plurality of types determined in advance according to each variation pattern. select. In addition, when one type of variation mode is determined in advance for each variation pattern, it is determined to use the variation mode according to the received variation pattern. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first decorative symbol variation start process (step S801).

  First decorative symbol variation start process (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the first decorative symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first decorative symbol variation process (step S802).

  First decorative symbol variation processing (step S802): The end of the variation time determined in accordance with the variation pattern is monitored. Further, stop control of the first decorative symbol is performed. When the variation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first decorative symbol stop process (step S803).

  First decorative symbol stop process (step S803): Control is performed to finally stop the variation of the first decorative symbol and derive and display the stopped symbol. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the first decorative symbol process. In the first variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the first variation pattern command has been received (step S831), and if it has been received, the variation pattern of the first decorative pattern is displayed. Then, a selection is made from a plurality of types determined in advance according to the variation pattern (step S832). Then, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S834).

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the first decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the first decorative symbol process. In the first decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the value of the first start winning prize counter by -1 (step S841). Further, control is performed so as to start the variation of the first decorative design (step S842). For example, the VDP 109 is instructed to start changing the first decorative symbol. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command received from the game control microcomputer 560 is set in the variation time timer (step S843). That is, the variable time timer is started. Then, the value of the first effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first decorative symbol variation process (step S802) (step S844).

  52 to 54 are flowcharts showing the first decorative symbol variation process (step S802) in the first decorative symbol process. In the first decorative symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the first variation interruption flag is set (step S1821), and if the first variation interruption flag is not set, the first interruption designation command is issued. It is confirmed whether it has been received (step S1822). If the first interruption designation command has been received, the first fluctuation interruption flag is set (step S1823), and the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display portion 9a (step S1824).

  If it is confirmed in step S821 that the first variation interruption flag is set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a first resumption designation command has been received (step S1831). If the first restart designation command has been received, the first variation interruption flag is reset (step S1832), and the variation of the first decorative symbol is resumed in the first variable display portion 9a (step S1833). If the first restart designation command has not been received, the first decorative symbol variation process is terminated.

  If it is confirmed in step S1822 that the first interrupt designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the variation time timer by 1 (step S1826). If the variation time timer has not timed out (step S1827), it is determined whether or not the time after the start of variation has passed the start time of the re-lottery effect (step S1834). If the variation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the first effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the first decorative symbol stop process (step S803) (step S1828).

  If the variation pattern includes the re-lottery effect and the time after the start of variation has passed the start time of the re-lottery effect (Y in step S1834), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern data storage area. Check the start time of the jackpot symbol determination effect in the variation pattern recognizable from the EXT data stored in the EXT data, and by checking the value of the variation time timer, the time after the start of the variation is the start time of the jackpot symbol determination effect It is determined whether or not elapses (step S1839).

  In this embodiment, the re-lottery effect before the start of the jackpot game includes a promotion effect and a jackpot symbol determination effect. The promotion effect is an effect that gives a player an opportunity (chance) to promote a predetermined symbol to a symbol higher than the symbol. As will be described later, when the promotion effect is being executed, if the player operates the symbol promotion button 120 within the promotion effective period and clears (establishes) a predetermined condition, the normal symbol, the short-time symbol, etc. It is promoted to a probabilistic design or a probabilistic short-time design. For example, when a normal symbol is promoted to a probability variation symbol and the ratio of the probability variation symbol to the total decoration symbol is increased, it seems to the player that the probability that the probability variation symbol is a big hit increases. Since the probability variation state is a very advantageous state for the player, the player operates the symbol promotion button 120 during the promotion effect in order to promote the normal symbol to the probability variation symbol. The jackpot symbol determination effect is an effect in which the decoration symbol is re-varied by a specific symbol arrangement reflecting the symbols changed in the promotion effect, and the jackpot symbol determined after the promotion effect is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol. is there.

  If the start time of the big hit symbol fixed effect has not elapsed, the CPU 101 for effect control determines whether or not the re-lottery effect is being executed by checking the value of the variable time timer (step) S1841). At this time, the fact that it is determined that the re-lottery effect is not being executed means that it is immediately after the re-lottery effect is started. If the re-lottery effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 101 starts changing the promotion effect (step S1842). Further, the production control CPU 101 starts measuring the promotion effective period (step S1844).

  If the re-lottery effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the promotion effective period has elapsed by checking the value of the variable time timer (step S1845). If the promotion effective period has not elapsed, the production control microcomputer 101 confirms that the symbol promotion button 120 is on (the state where the symbol promotion button 120 is pressed) (step S1847). Further, when it is confirmed that the symbol promotion button 120 is turned on (step S1848), the number of times of turning on is counted by an on number counter (step S1849).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the promotion condition in the promotion effect (the number of operations of the symbol promotion button 120) is established (cleared) (step S1850). When the promotion condition is satisfied, the promoted decorative symbol is stored in a predetermined storage area (promotion symbol storage area) in the RAM (step S1851).

  If the promotion effective period has elapsed (Y in step S1845), the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the promoted symbol is stored in the promoted symbol storage area (step S1852), and the promoted symbol is stored. If so, display control is executed to display on the first variable display section 9a that the symbol displayed in the promotion effect has been promoted to a symbol higher than that (step S1853). If the promoted symbol is not stored, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the demoting condition is satisfied (step S1854).

  Here, the demoting condition is a condition for demoting a symbol to a symbol lower than that. For example, it is a condition for demoting a probability variation symbol or a probability variation short time symbol to a normal symbol or a time short symbol. In this embodiment, when it is not possible to confirm that the symbol promotion button 120 has been pressed once by the player during the promotion effective period, it is determined that the demoting condition is satisfied. In this way, a player who is not willing to participate in a game can be actively participated in the game by demoting the symbol. For example, if it is determined that the probability variation big hit will be demoted, if all of the probability variation symbols are demoted to non-probability variation symbols (normal symbols and short-time symbols), the non-probability big hits (normal big hits and short-time big hits) Since it will be decided, at least one of the plurality of probability variation symbols must not be demoted to a non-probability variation symbol. In order to realize this, for example, at least one of the probability variation symbols (for example, “5”) may be determined in advance as not demoted to the non-probability variation symbol.

  When the demoting condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 101 stores the demoted decorative symbol in a predetermined storage area (degraded symbol storage area) in the RAM (step S1855). And the display control which displays that the predetermined symbol was demoted in the background symbol display part 9c is performed (step S1856). When the demoting condition is not satisfied, the effect control CPU 101 displays on the background symbol display unit 9c that the predetermined symbol displayed in the promotion effect has not been promoted to a symbol higher than that. Display control is executed (step S1857).

  If it is determined in step S1839 that the start time of the jackpot symbol determination effect has elapsed, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms the value of the variable time timer and is executing the jackpot symbol determination effect. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1861). At this time, the fact that it is determined that the big hit symbol finalizing effect is not being executed means that it is immediately after the big hit symbol finalizing effect is started. If it is not in the middle of executing the big hit symbol determination effect, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms the contents of the big hit effect flag and the re-lottery execution flag (step S1862) and displays the decorative symbol displayed on the first variable display portion 9a. The process of determining and storing the jackpot display symbol is performed (step S1863), and the process ends. If the big hit symbol determination effect is being executed in step S1861, the effect control CPU 101 ends the process as it is.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the big hit is a normal big hit, a short or big hit or a probable big hit by checking the set state of the big hit effect flag (normal big hit effect flag, hourly big hit effect flag, probability variable big hit effect flag). It is recognized whether the probability change time is a big hit (step S1862). The effect control CPU 101 recognizes whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending effect after the end of the big hit game by checking whether or not the re-lottery execution flag after the end of the big hit is set ( Step S1862). Further, the production control CPU 101 recognizes the decorative symbols whose rank has been changed, that is, the promoted symbols and the demoted symbols by confirming the contents described in the promoted symbol storage area and the demoted symbol storage area.

  Depending on the situation, the jackpot display symbol determination table for the normal jackpot used for determining the normal symbol, the jackpot display symbol determination table for the short and big jackpot used for the short and long jackpot, and the probability variable jackpot A jackpot display symbol determination table for probability variation jackpots used for the above and a jackpot display symbol determination table for probability variation jackpots used for probability variation jackpots are prepared in advance. Further, in order to reflect the promoted or demoted symbols, each of the above jackpot display symbol determination tables is prepared in advance with a plurality of tables in which the types and numbers of the promoted and demoted symbols are changed. These jackpot display symbol determination tables are assigned a plurality of determination values in association with each symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 recognizes what kind of symbol should be determined as the jackpot display symbol, and then selects the jackpot display symbol determination table. For example, when only the probable big hit effect flag is set and the re-lottery execution flag is set after the big hit is finished, it is necessary to determine the non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol or short-time symbol) as the big hit display symbol. Then, the big hit display symbol determination table for the normal big hit or the big hit display symbol determination table for the short time big hit is selected. In addition, when there are a plurality of tables that can be selected in this way, the tables may be selected according to a predetermined rule, or may be selected using a random number. Then, the jackpot display symbol determination random number is extracted, and the symbol associated with the determination value that matches the extracted value of the jackpot display symbol determination random number is determined as the jackpot display symbol. Then, the effect control CPU 101 stores the determined jackpot display symbol in the jackpot display symbol storage area in the RAM (step S1863).

  In addition, by setting a large number of determination values in advance for the changed symbol (the promoted symbol or the demoted symbol), the changed symbol can be determined as a jackpot display symbol at a high rate.

  Through the control as described above, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b and the second variable display portion 9b and the effect control CPU 101 enters the big hit gaming state, the game control microcomputer 560 performs the first control. Based on the reception of the 1 interruption designation command, the first fluctuation interruption flag is set and the fluctuation interruption process is performed. Then, control is performed so that the processing in steps S1826 to S1863 is not executed until a restart designation command is received. That is, control is performed so as not to change the first decorative design.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the hold storage display control process. The effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the first effective start winning designation command is received in the hold memory display control process (step S851), and if the first effective start winning designation command is received, the first start winning prize is received. The value of the number counter is incremented by 1 (step S852). If the value of the difference counter is 0 (step S853), the value of the total pending storage display counter indicating the total pending storage number, that is, the total pending storage display counter for counting the total pending storage number is incremented by 1 (step S856). .

  If the value of the difference counter is not 0, the value of the total pending storage display counter is confirmed, and if the value of the total pending storage display counter has not reached the upper limit of 8 (step S854), the process proceeds to step S856. To do. If the value of the summation pending storage display counter reaches 8, the value of the difference counter is decremented by 1 (step S855), and the process proceeds to step S862.

  If the second valid start winning designation command has been received (step S857), the value of the second start winning number counter is incremented by 1 (step S858). If the value of the difference counter is 0 (step S859), the process proceeds to step S856.

  If the value of the difference counter is not 0, the value of the total pending storage display counter is checked. If the value of the total pending storage display counter has not reached the upper limit value of 8 (step S860), the process proceeds to step S856. To do. If the value of the summation pending storage display counter has reached 8, the value of the difference counter is decremented by 1 (step S861), and the process proceeds to step S862.

  In step S862, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not an invalid start winning designation command has been received. If the invalid start winning designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S866. When the invalid start winning designation command is received, if the value of the total pending storage display counter has not reached 8 (step S863), the value of the total pending storage display counter is incremented by 1 (step S864), and the difference number The counter value is incremented by 1 (step S865). Then, control goes to a step S866.

  In step S866, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the summed hold storage display counter has been changed. If the value of the summed hold storage display counter has been changed, the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is changed to the changed state. Set the state according to the value. That is, the total number (total number of pending storages) displayed on the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is set to a number according to the changed value. In order to confirm whether or not the value of the summation pending storage display counter has been changed, the effect control CPU 101 forms a pre-update summation pending storage display counter in the RAM, and adds the value of the summation pending storage display counter and the summation pending pre-update. The values of the storage display counter are compared, and if they do not match, it may be determined that the value of the summation pending storage display counter has been changed. Then, when it is determined that the value of the summation pending storage display counter has been changed, the effect control CPU 101 sets the changed summation pending storage display counter value in the pre-update summation pending storage display counter. In addition to the processes in steps S856 and S864, the process for changing the value of the summation pending storage display counter includes processes in steps S912 and S916 described later.

  The total suspension storage display counter is a counter indicating the total number displayed on the symbol suspension storage display unit 18c. The difference number counter is a counter indicating the number of dummy increases. The value of the first start winning number counter indicates the first reserved memory number recognized by the effect control CPU 101. The value of the second start winning number counter indicates the second reserved memory number recognized by the effect control CPU 101.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, when a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 in a state where the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit of 4, or the second reserved memory number is the upper limit value. When the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 in a state where the number has reached 4, an invalid start winning designation command is transmitted. That is, an invalid start winning designation command is transmitted when an invalid start winning occurs. The CPU 101 for effect control is displayed on the symbol hold storage display unit 18c when the invalid start winning is generated unless the value of the total hold storage display counter reaches the upper limit value of 8 by the processing of steps S862 to S865. The total number is increased by 1. That is, the dummy increase number is increased by one.

  In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control has received the first start prize when the number of dummy increases is 1 or more and the value of the total pending storage display counter reaches the upper limit value by the processing of steps S853 to S855. In this case, the dummy increase is digested by decreasing the dummy increase number by one. That is, the dummy pending storage is reduced. In addition, if the number of dummy increases is 1 or more and the value of the total pending storage display counter has reached the upper limit value by the processing of steps S859 to S861, the second increase in winning occurs. Decrease the number by 1 and digest the dummy reserved memory. When the dummy increase number is 1 or more and the value of the total pending storage display counter has reached the upper limit value of 8, the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value of 4 Either a dummy hold storage has occurred because an invalid start prize has occurred at the first start prize opening 13, or an invalid start prize has occurred at the second start prize opening 14 with the second reserved memory number reaching the upper limit of 4. This means that a dummy pending storage has occurred. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 does not transmit the first effective start winning designation command in a state where the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit of 4, and the second reserved memory number is the upper limit value. The second effective start winning designation command is not transmitted in a state where 4 is reached (see FIG. 29). Therefore, for example, when the value of the difference counter is not 0 and the value of the total pending storage display counter has reached the upper limit of 8, the first valid start winning designation command is received. This means that the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit of 4, and an invalid start winning has occurred at the second start winning port 14, and the dummy reserved memory number has been increased. In such a situation, when the first valid start winning designation command is received, the amount corresponding to the dummy hold storage in the sum hold storage is the true sum hold memory (in this example, the hold based on the first valid start win) Memory).

  In addition, as one of the methods for reducing the dummy reserved memory, the background design variation pattern (see FIG. 11) including a temporary stop (for example, 0.5 second or 1 second stop) mode is used as the background design variation pattern. The CPU 101 has already illustrated the method of subtracting 1 from the total number of reserved storage when the background symbol is temporarily stopped. one of.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the background symbol process (step S706) shown in FIG. The effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S900 to S908 according to the value of the background symbol process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Background symbol variation waiting process (step S900): It is determined whether or not the background symbol variation start condition is satisfied. If the background symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the background symbol display unit 9c starts the variation. To control. The background symbol variation start condition is any one of the first variation patterns # 1 to # 8 and # 11 to # 14 specified in the command analysis process (8001 (H) to 8008 (H), 8021 (H) to 8024 (H )) Or any one of the second variation patterns # 1 to # 8 and # 11 to # 14 (8011 (H) to 8018 (H), 8031 (H) to 8034 (H)) This is established when it is confirmed that an effect control command has been received. Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the notice selection process (step S901).

  Preliminary notice selection process (step S901): It is determined whether or not a notice effect is to be executed and an effect mode in the case of executing the notice effect. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start process (step S902). In the advance notice selection process, the effect control CPU 101, for example, uses the character image on the variable display device 9 to produce a notice effect (a notice effect other than continuous notice, a special symbol stop symbol becomes a big hit symbol, or reach occurs. Whether or not to perform an effect for notifying in advance) and the type of the notice effect when it is performed. For example, when the background symbol variation starts in response to the reception of the first variation pattern command and the probability variation jackpot designation command or the normal jackpot designation command is received as the display result command, the announcement effect is performed. decide. At that time, instead of executing the announcement effect with a probability of 100%, it may be determined by lottery using a random number whether or not the announcement effect is performed.

  Background symbol variation start processing (step S902): Control is performed so that the variation of the left middle right background symbol is started. Also, the background symbol stop symbol is determined according to the received display result command, and the background symbol variation time is set to 10 seconds. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing (first half) process (step S903).

  Background symbol changing (first half) process (step S903): The end of the background symbol changing time (in this case, 10 seconds or 5 seconds) is monitored. When the variation time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation waiting process (step S900) or the background symbol variation (second half) process (step S904). If the variation time of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol or second decorative symbol) is 10 seconds or 5 seconds, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation waiting process (step S900). If the decorative symbol variation time exceeds 10 seconds, it is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation (second half) process (step S904). When updating to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation (second half) process, the remaining time of the decorative symbol variation time (for example, if the ornament symbol variation time is 20 seconds) is left as the background symbol variation time. Time is set to 10 seconds). Further, the time when the background symbol variation (first half) processing is completed (when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of variation) corresponds to the switching point described above.

  Background symbol changing (second half) processing (step S904): The end of the background symbol changing time is monitored. When the fluctuation time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol stop process (step S905). In the background symbol changing (second half) processing, the effect control CPU 101 may extend the background symbol changing time. For example, the background symbol change is started in response to receiving any of the first change patterns # 1 to # 8 and # 11 to # 14, and the second change is performed during the background symbol change (second half) processing. This is a case where any one of the patterns # 1 to # 8 and # 11 to # 14 is received.

  Background symbol stop process (step S905): Control is performed to finally stop the change of the background symbol and display the stop symbol. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900) or the jackpot display process (step S906). When updating to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S906), the jackpot display process (step S906) is performed on the condition that the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command is received. Update to a value corresponding to. Basically, the period in which the background symbol stop process is executed is the same as the period in which the first big hit symbol stop process or the second big hit symbol stop process is executed by the game control microcomputer 560, but will be described later. In addition, there is a case where a period from when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol to when the jackpot game is started is short (see, for example, step S971 in FIG. 61 or step S634 in FIG. 68). In that case, the period during which the background symbol stop process is executed may be shorter than the period during which the first big hit symbol stop process or the second big hit symbol stop process is being executed by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Big hit display process (step S906): Control of the big hit display is performed. Then, upon receiving a winning prize opening release display command (a winning prize opening release display command related to the first round) that indicates that the big hit game has actually started, the background symbol process flag value is processed in the round ( Update to a value corresponding to step S907). Basically, the period in which the jackpot display process is executed is the same as the period in which the first jackpot display process or the second jackpot display process is being executed by the game control microcomputer 560, but the background symbol is stopped. When the period from when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a symbol to when the big hit game is started is short (for example, see step S971 in FIG. 61 or step S634 in FIG. 68), in particular, the period is the game control microcomputer 560. Is shorter than the period during which the first jackpot display process or the second jackpot display process is being executed, the period during which the jackpot display process is executed is executed by the game control microcomputer 560 by the first jackpot symbol stop process or the second jackpot display process. It may be shorter than the period during which the stop process is executed.

  In-round processing (step S907): Display control during round is performed. For example, if a display command indicating that the special winning opening is open is received, the display control of the number of rounds is performed.

  Post-round processing (step S908): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the big prize opening indicating that the big prize opening is after being opened (closed), an interval display is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S909): Control of the big hit end display after the big hit game ends. For example, when an ending command specifying the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. If execution of the re-lottery effect is specified by the ending command, the re-lottery effect is executed in the ending effect. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol variation waiting process (step S900).

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the background symbol fluctuation start waiting process (step S900). In the background symbol variation start waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command has been received (step S911). When the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command is received, the value of the total pending storage display counter is decremented by 1 (step S912). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the notice selection process (step S901) (step S913).

  When the first variation pattern command or the second variation pattern command has not been received, the values of the first starting winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are 0, and the value of the difference counter is not 0 It is confirmed whether or not (step S915).

  The value of the first starting winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter is 0 and the value of the difference counter is a non-zero value. It means that the total pending storage is all dummy pending storage. In such a case, the effect control CPU 101 does not start the change of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, but controls to change the background symbol. Then, the total pending memory is digested.

  When the values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are 0 and the value of the difference number counter is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the total pending storage display counter. -1 (step S916), and the difference counter value is decremented by 1 (step S917). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start process (step S902) (step S918).

  FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes background symbol control is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls the background symbol display unit 9c in accordance with the data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data describes each variation mode constituting a variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the background symbol. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, and performs control for variably displaying the background symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 synchronizes with the control of the background symbol display unit 9c based on the display control execution data, and changes the lighting state of various lamps based on the lamp control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. And output the sound number data to the sound output board 70. That is, the various lamps and the speaker 27 are controlled in synchronization with the control of the background symbol display unit 9c.

  The process table shown in FIG. 58 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern. Furthermore, different process tables are prepared according to differences in the production mode when the announcement production is executed. That is, in this embodiment, the effect mode of the notice effect is realized based on the process data set in the selected process table. In other words, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control according to the contents of the process table corresponding to the effect mode of the notice effect when executing the notice effect.

  Hereinafter, processing such as background symbol variation start processing in the background symbol process will be described. In the following description, a case where the gaming state is a probability change state or a normal state is taken as an example. When the gaming state is the short time state, the time set for each timer is a value corresponding to half the time in the following description. Further, in the background symbol variation start start waiting process, the control for starting the variation of the background symbol is started based on the reception of the first variation pattern command, and the background symbol based on the reception of the second variation pattern command. In the following description, the case where the control for starting the fluctuation of the background symbol is started based on the reception of the first fluctuation pattern command is taken as an example.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the background symbol variation start process (step S902). In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 determines a background symbol stop symbol (step S920). When a display designation command is received as a display result command and a variation pattern command having a variation time of 10 seconds is received, a background symbol in which the left middle right symbol does not match is determined as a stop symbol. If a display designation command is received as a display result command and a variation pattern command having a variation time exceeding 10 seconds is received, a background symbol in which the left and right symbols match and the middle symbol does not match is determined as the stop symbol To do. When a probability change jackpot designation command or a normal jackpot designation command is received as a display result command, a background symbol reminiscent of a jackpot as a stop symbol (for example, a normal jackpot symbol of a background symbol with left, middle and right aligned) decide. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the summation pending storage display counter is a predetermined value (4 in this example) or more (step S920a).

  When the value of the total pending storage display counter is 4 or more, the CPU for effect control 101 has a background symbol variation pattern No. 9 is selected (step S920b), and the process proceeds to step S924. When the value of the summation pending storage display counter is not 4 or more, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the difference counter is 0 (step S921).

  When the value of the difference counter is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 uses the background symbol variation pattern No. 1 having a variation time of 10 seconds. 1 and no. 9 (see FIG. 10), the background symbol variation pattern No. 10 is selected (step S922). When the value of the difference counter is 0, the background symbol variation pattern No. 1 is selected (step S923).

  The fact that the value of the difference counter is not 0 means that there is still a dummy pending storage that cannot be digested. In that case, the background symbol variation pattern No. with a temporary stop state in the variation pattern. Ten variation patterns are used. As will be described later, when temporarily stopping, the value of the summation pending storage display counter and the value of the difference counter are decremented by 1 to digest the dummy pending storage. When the value of the difference counter is 2 or more, the background symbol variation pattern No. 1 in which the temporary stop is performed a plurality of times (for example, twice) in the variation pattern. Ten variation patterns are used. In this case, a plurality of values of the summation pending storage display counter and the difference counter are subtracted before the fluctuation time ends.

  In addition, since the total number of reserved memories in the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is reduced by 1 with the temporary stop of the background symbols, the player decreases the total number of reserved memories by 1 with the re-variation of the background symbols after the temporary stop. I feel I was done. Therefore, there is no sense of incongruity with the total number of reserved storage. Also, digesting the dummy hold memory with the temporary stop of the background symbol means that if the re-variation of the background symbol after the temporary stop is regarded as one variable display (variation), the start condition of the variable display is satisfied. Based on this, the background pattern is changed a plurality of times.

  The effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used (step S924). Then, the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S925). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step S926). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern in the background symbol display unit 9c. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27. Then, a value corresponding to the variation time (10 seconds or 5 seconds in this example) is set in the background symbol variation time timer A to start the background symbol variation time timer A (step S927), and the decorative symbol ( When the background pattern is changed based on the reception of the first variation pattern command, the first decoration is displayed. When the background pattern is changed based on the reception of the second variation pattern command, the second decoration is displayed. A value corresponding to the variation time of the symbol is set and the entire variation time timer is started (step S928). When the decorative symbol variation time is 10 seconds, the value set in the overall variation time timer is the same as the value set in the background symbol variation time timer A in step S927. Further, when the background symbol is changed based on the dummy pending storage (“Y” in step S915), a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the total change time timer in step S928. Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing (first half) process (step S903) (step S929).

  When it is determined by the background symbol fluctuation start process as described above that the value of the summation pending storage display counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (4 in this example), the first special symbol (first decorative symbol) or the second special symbol The variable display time until the background symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the symbol (second decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the background symbol display unit 9c is shortened. Therefore, even if the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, a shortening variation occurs during variable display of either the first special symbol (first decorative symbol) or the second special symbol (second decorative symbol). However, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the shortening variation is not performed during the other variable display.

  For example, when the total reserved memory number is 4 (for example, when the first reserved memory number is 4 and the second reserved memory number is 2), or when the combined reserved memory number is 5 (for example, the first reserved memory number) When the number of memories is 3 and the number of second reserved memories is 2, when the number of accumulated reserved memories is 4, (for example, when the number of first reserved memories is 3 and the number of second reserved memories is 1, Since the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined value “4”, the background symbol display section 9c is subjected to a shortening variation of the background symbol, and one of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is 0. However, when the total number of reserved memories is 4 or more (for example, when the first number of reserved memories is 4 and the number of second reserved memories is 0), the background symbol display unit 9c has a background symbol shortening variation. Done.

  60 to 62 are flowcharts showing the background symbol variation (first half) processing (step S903). In the background symbol variation (first half) processing, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the value of the overall variation time timer and the value of the background symbol variation time timer A by 1 (steps S941 and S942). When the value of the total variation time timer is 0, the process of decrementing the value of the total variation time timer by -1 is not executed, and when the value of the background symbol variation time timer A is 0, the background symbol variation time is The process of decrementing the value of timer A by -1 is not executed. If the background symbol variation time timer B is set, the value of the background symbol variation time timer B is decremented by 1 (step S943). The background symbol variation time timer B is a timer that is set when a new variation pattern command (in this example, the second variation pattern command) is received after the variation of the background symbol is started. In addition, the background symbol variation time timer B is set to a value corresponding to the variation time of the decorative symbol (in this example, the second decorative symbol) indicated by the newly received variation pattern command.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the background symbol variation time timer A has timed out, that is, whether or not the value of the background symbol variation time timer A has become 0 (step S944). If the background symbol fluctuation time timer A has timed out, the process proceeds to step S953. If not timed out, the process timer value is decremented by 1 (step S945). When the process timer times out (when the value becomes 0), the process data is switched (steps S946 and S947). That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer, and the rendering device (variable) is set based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next. The control state for the display device 9 or the like is changed.

  If the process data after switching is data indicating temporary stop, the value of the summation pending storage counter and the value of the difference counter are decremented by 1 (step S948). That is, the dummy reserved memory is digested.

  Further, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not a new variation pattern command (in this example, the second variation pattern command) has been received (step S949), and if received, sets the background symbol B variation request flag. In step S950, the background symbol variation time timer B is set to a value corresponding to the variation time of the decorative symbol (in this example, the second decorative symbol) indicated by the newly received variation pattern command (step S951). The background symbol B fluctuation request flag is a flag indicating that a new fluctuation pattern command has been received before becoming a switching point. The background symbol B is a background symbol that starts to change when it is assumed that it has started based on reception of a new variation pattern command. However, the background pattern B is not changed at the time of the switching point.

  If it is determined in step S944 that the background symbol variation time timer A has timed out, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the background symbol B variation determination flag is set (step S953). Control to temporarily stop the off symbol is performed (step S956), and the background symbol B variation determination flag is reset (step S957). Then, control goes to a step S976. Note that when the background symbol is temporarily stopped, the temporary stop state is maintained only for a predetermined temporary stop period. However, such control includes data indicating the temporary stop in the temporary stop period. This is realized by setting in association with the data indicating.

  Note that the background symbol B variation determination flag is to switch the background symbol variation corresponding to the variation of the decorative symbol indicated by the new variation pattern command when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the background symbol. This is set when the change time after switching does not coincide with any of the change times shown in FIG. For example, the variation time of the decorative pattern indicated by the new variation pattern command is 20 seconds. However, when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation of the background symbol, the variation has already been made for 3 seconds (the variation variation start of the background symbol). In the case where the decoration pattern indicated by the new variation pattern command is started when 7 seconds have elapsed from the time), the variation time after switching is 17 seconds. In that case, it does not coincide with any of the fluctuation times shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, when such a situation occurs, the end point of the variation of the decorative symbol indicated by the new variation pattern command is determined as the background symbol by using one of the variation times of the background symbol shown in FIG. Control is performed so that the switching point is moved so that the fluctuation time elapses. In the above example, if the variation time of the background symbol of 15 seconds is used, the switching point is shifted by 2 seconds so that the end point of the variation of the decorative symbol becomes the time when the variation time of the background symbol elapses. That is, 12 seconds after the start of the change of the background symbol becomes the changed switching point.

  If it is confirmed in step S953 that the background symbol B variation determination flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the entire variation time timer has timed out (step S954A). If the total variation time timer has timed out, it is confirmed whether or not the background symbol B variation request flag is set (step S954B). If the background symbol B fluctuation request flag is set, the background symbol B fluctuation request flag is reset (step S954C), and the process proceeds to step S976. If the background symbol B fluctuation request flag is not set, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol stop process (step S905) (step S955). If the total variation time timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to step S958.

  The fact that the background symbol B variation request flag is not set when the total variation time timer times out means that the variation time of the decorative symbol (in this example, the first decorative symbol) corresponding to the variation of the background symbol is 10 Means that no new variation pattern command was received during the variation time. The fact that the total variation time timer has not timed out means that the variation time of the decorative symbol (in this example, the first decorative symbol) corresponding to the variation of the background symbol exceeds 10 seconds.

  In step S958, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the background symbol B fluctuation request flag is set. If the background symbol B variation request flag is not set, that is, if a new variation pattern command is not received before 10 seconds have elapsed since the beginning of variation of the background symbol, the value of the total variation time timer (decoration A background symbol variation pattern (see FIG. 11) corresponding to the symbol variation time (corresponding to a time obtained by subtracting 10 seconds from the symbol variation time) is selected (step S959). Then, a process table corresponding to the background pattern variation pattern to be used is selected (step S960). Then, the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S961). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step S962). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing (second half) process (step S904) (step S963).

  When the background symbol B fluctuation request flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the background symbol B fluctuation request flag (step S965). Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the background symbol A (in this example, the first decorative symbol. The variation of the background symbol A also corresponds to the variation of the first special symbol) is determined as the big hit symbol. (Step S965B). If the big hit symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S968. When the jackpot symbol is not determined, the value of the total variation time timer (corresponding to the time obtained by subtracting 10 seconds from the variation time of the decorative symbol) and the value of the background symbol variation time timer B (the new variation pattern command indicates) It is compared with the variation time of the decorative pattern (corresponding to the time obtained by subtracting the time from the start of the variation to the switching point) (step S966). When the value of the total variation time timer is larger, the process proceeds to step S968.

  When the value of the background symbol variation time timer B is larger, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether there is a background symbol variation pattern (see FIG. 11) having a variation time that matches the value of the background symbol variation time timer B. (Step S975). If there is such a background symbol variation pattern, control is performed to temporarily stop the background symbol deviation symbol (step S975B), and the value of the background symbol variation time timer B is set to the overall variation time timer (step S976). Then, the value of the summation pending storage display counter is decremented by -1 (step S977), and the process proceeds to step S981.

  When there is no background symbol variation pattern having a variation time that matches the value of the background symbol variation time timer B, the maximum value among the variation times smaller than the value of the background symbol variation time timer B (see FIG. 11). The value obtained by subtracting the value of the background symbol variation time timer B from the above is set in the background symbol variation time timer A (step S978), and the background symbol variation determination flag is set (step S979). For example, when the value of the background symbol variation time timer B is a value corresponding to 17 seconds, the maximum value among the variation times (see FIG. 11) smaller than the value of the background symbol variation time timer B is 15 seconds. Therefore, a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the background symbol fluctuation time timer A. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the background symbol A is adjusted, but the fluctuation time of the background symbol B may be adjusted. For example, you may make it adjust the time of the high-speed fluctuation | variation performed for the background symbol B first.

  The processing in steps S978 and S979 is processing for changing the switching point. After the processing of steps S978 and S979 is executed, when the background symbol variation (first half) processing is executed, the processing of steps S942 to S944 is executed, and when the background symbol variation time timer A times out, Since the switching point has arrived, the process of step S953 is executed.

  In step S968, the effect control CPU 101 increments the value of the difference counter by +1. In this embodiment, when the change of the background symbol is not switched to the variation of the background symbol B at the switching point (that is, when the “total variation time timer” is determined in step S965), the total pending storage number is − This is because the number of the second reserved memory is decremented by -1 in the second decorative symbol process, so that the dummy reserved memory is substantially increased by one.

  If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (in this example, the first decorative symbol) corresponding to the variation of the background symbol A is determined as the big hit symbol by the process of step S965B, the variation of the background symbol is continued. It will be. In this case, the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation of the background symbol B (in this example, the second decorative symbol) is more than the end of the variation of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the background symbol A (in this example, the first decorative symbol). It may be later at the end of the fluctuation. In this embodiment, in such a case, when the variation of the background symbol A is finished, the variable display device 9 performs an effect related to the big hit game. Then, while the big hit game is being executed, the variation of the decorative symbol (in this example, the second decorative symbol) corresponding to the variation of the background symbol B is interrupted. Thereafter, when the big hit game ends, the variation of the decorative symbol (in this example, the second decorative symbol) corresponding to the variation of the background symbol B is resumed. However, for example, even if the variation of the second decorative symbol is resumed, the variation of the background symbol B corresponding to the variation of the second decorative symbol is not resumed. In such a case, since the difference counter is incremented by 1 in the process of step S968, the background symbol change is started again based on the determination of step S915. However, after the big hit game executed in response to the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the background symbol A (in this example, the first decorative symbol) being the big hit symbol, the variation of the background symbol B is changed. You may make it resume.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the background symbol variation pattern used in the background symbol variation in-process (second half). Specifically, a background symbol variation pattern that does not include a temporary stop mode is selected from the background symbol variation patterns having a variation time corresponding to the value of the overall variation time timer (step S969).

  Here again, when the value of the difference counter is not 0, the background symbol variation pattern including the temporary stop mode is selected from the background symbol variation patterns having the variation time corresponding to the value of the overall variation time timer. You may do it. However, since the value of the difference counter is incremented by 1 in the process of step S968, the background symbol fluctuation pattern including the temporary stop mode is always selected. When the background symbol variation pattern including the temporary stop mode is selected, the value of the total pending storage display counter and the value of the difference counter are subtracted by 1 when the temporary stop is performed, and the dummy pending storage is digested. When the value of the difference counter is 2 or more, a background symbol variation pattern in which a temporary stop is performed a plurality of times (for example, twice) in the variation pattern is used. In this case, a plurality of values of the summation pending storage display counter and the difference counter are subtracted before the fluctuation time ends.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol change indicated by the new variation pattern command (in this example, the second variation pattern command) determined in step S949 is a big hit symbol (step S970). If it is not a big hit symbol, the process proceeds to step S960. In the case of a big hit symbol, at the end of the variation of the decorative symbol, a predetermined time with respect to the end of the variation of the background symbol A (the background symbol that is currently fluctuating, ie, the background symbol that is stopped when the total variation time timer times out) It is confirmed whether it is within (step S971). If it is within the predetermined time, a background symbol jackpot display flag is set (step S972), and if it exceeds the predetermined time, a background symbol stop request flag is set (step S973). Then, control goes to a step S960. If it is determined in step S966 that the total variation time timer is longer and the determination in step S970 is "N", a background symbol variation pattern including a temporary stop mode may be selected. Good.

  In this embodiment, the predetermined time is the sum of the jackpot symbol display time and the jackpot display time (the value of the first jackpot display time timer set in step S184 in the first jackpot symbol stop process shown in FIG. 37). The second jackpot symbol stop process corresponds to the value of the second jackpot display time timer set in the process corresponding to the process of step S184). That is, it is the time from when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed until the big hit game is started.

  The effect control CPU 101 sets a flag when, for example, the display result command received immediately before the reception of the second variation pattern command is the probability variation jackpot designation command or the normal jackpot designation command, and is the flag set? Depending on whether or not, it can be determined whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol variation indicated by the new variation pattern command (in this example, the second variation pattern command) is a big hit symbol. In addition, the end of the variation of the decorative symbol can be confirmed by the value of the background symbol variation time timer B.

  In addition, since the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the first decorative symbol are synchronized and the variation of the second special symbol and the variation of the second decorative symbol are synchronized, in this example, the background symbol A is Since it corresponds to the variation of the first decorative symbol, the end of the variation of the background symbol A and the end of the variation of the first decorative symbol are the same time point, and the processes in steps S970 to S973 are the same as the first special symbol and the first special symbol. When the variation of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol is started by the end of the variation after the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, and the stop symbol of the variation is a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol and the second ornament The background symbol jackpot display flag is set on the condition that the end point of the symbol variation is within a predetermined time with respect to the end of the variation of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol (step S972), and exceeds the predetermined time. On the condition that the background Set the handle stop flag becomes (step S973) that.

  In step S981, the effect control CPU 101 checks the value of the difference counter. If the value of the difference counter is not 0, the background symbol variation pattern including the temporary stop mode is selected from the background symbol variation patterns having the variation time corresponding to the value in the overall variation time timer (step S982). If the value of the difference counter is 0, a background symbol variation pattern that does not include the temporary stop mode is selected from the background symbol variation patterns having a variation time corresponding to the value in the overall variation time timer (step S983). ). The background symbol variation pattern selected in the process of step S983 is No. when the determination in step S975 is “Y”. 3 *, no. 5 * or No. 7 * (variation time is 15 seconds, 25 seconds, or 35 seconds. When it is determined that a new variation pattern command has been received in step S949, the background symbol variation time timer B sets the variation time in step S951. A corresponding value (a value corresponding to 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, or 40 seconds) is set, but after that, the value of the background symbol fluctuation time timer B must be set before the determination of step S944 for the switching point is performed. Is subtracted (see step S943), and if the determination in step S975 is “Y”, the background symbol variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, or 40 seconds is obtained in step S983. It should be noted that when a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the background symbol fluctuation time timer B in the process of step S951, step S951 is performed. When it is determined as “N” in the determination of 975, the variation time smaller than the value of the background symbol variation time timer B (smaller than the value corresponding to 10 seconds) is not defined in FIG. May be shifted to step S955). When the determination in step S975 is “Y”, the background symbol variation pattern selected in the process of step S982 is No. 12 *, no. 14 * or No. 16 * (variation time is 15 seconds, 25 seconds or 35 seconds). If the determination in step S953 is “Y”, No. in the process of step S983. 2 * -No. A background symbol variation pattern of any one of 7 * (variation time 10 seconds, 15 seconds, 20 seconds, 25 seconds, 30 seconds or 35 seconds) is selected. In the process of step S982, no. 11 * -No. A background symbol variation pattern of any one of 16 * (variation time 10 seconds, 15 seconds, 20 seconds, 25 seconds, 30 seconds or 35 seconds) is selected.

  The processing of steps S982 and S983 is executed when it is determined in step S966 that the background symbol fluctuation time timer B is larger (both “Y” is determined in steps S954A and S954B). Except in the case of In that case, the remaining time of the variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol corresponding to the background symbol B is 10 seconds or more, and the total variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol corresponding to the background symbol B is 20 seconds. This is the case of 30 seconds or 40 seconds (see FIG. 11). That is, when the processes of steps S982 and S983 are executed, the entire variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol corresponding to the background symbol B is not 10 seconds. Further, as will be described later, when temporarily stopping, the value of the total pending storage display counter and the value of the difference counter are decremented by 1 to digest the dummy pending storage. When the value of the difference counter is 2 or more, a background symbol variation pattern in which a temporary stop is performed a plurality of times (for example, twice) in the variation pattern is used. In this case, a plurality of values of the summation pending storage display counter and the difference counter are subtracted before the fluctuation time ends.

  Then, a process table corresponding to the background pattern variation pattern to be used is selected (step S984). Then, the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S985). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step S986). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing (second half) process (step S904) (step S987).

  FIG. 63 to FIG. 66 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of background symbol fluctuations by the background symbol fluctuation starting process and the background symbol fluctuation middle (first half) process by the effect control CPU 101. FIG. 63 shows that the variation of the second decorative pattern starts in the second variable display portion 9b in response to receiving a new variation pattern command (in this example, the second variation pattern command) before the switching point arrives. It has been shown. In the second special symbol display 8b, the variation of the second special symbol is started under the control of the game control microcomputer 560.

  FIG. 63 shows background symbol B (as described above) at the switching point, rather than the remaining time of the variation time of background symbol A (same as the remaining time of variation time of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol). The change of the background pattern when it is assumed that it is started based on the reception of a new change pattern command, the change of the background pattern B is not made at the time of the switching point, and the change time is the second special pattern and the second change An example is shown in which the remaining time of the variation time (same as the variation time of the decorative symbol) is the same as the remaining time of the variation time of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. Furthermore, it is assumed that the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the background symbol B is 28 seconds.

  In that case, the production control CPU 101 confirms the background symbol B fluctuation request flag set in step S950 at the time when it first becomes the switching point (see step S944 in FIG. 60) (step S958 in FIG. 61). (Refer to step S978) and a background symbol fluctuation time timer A is set to a value corresponding to 3 seconds (see step S978), and a background symbol B fluctuation determination flag is set (see step S979).

  When the background symbol fluctuation time timer A times out, that is, when the changed switching point is reached (see step S944 in FIG. 60), it is confirmed that the background symbol B fluctuation determination flag is set (step S953). After setting the value of the background variation time timer B (corresponding to the remaining time of the variation time of the background symbol B. In this example, corresponding to 25 seconds) to the total variation time timer, the background symbol variation pattern is selected ( 62 (see steps S982 and S983 in FIG. 62), the background pattern variation is continued. The continued background symbol variation corresponds to the variation of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. In this embodiment, when the remaining time of the variation time of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol is longer than 10 seconds, the variable display of the background symbol accompanied by the reach effect can be performed. Therefore, in the case illustrated in FIG. 63, when 13 seconds have elapsed since the start of the background symbol change, No. with a reach effect is obtained. A 5 * background symbol variation pattern (see FIG. 11) can be used. When using a background symbol variation pattern with a reach effect, the effect control CPU 101, for example, in the middle of the left for the first 5 seconds, based on the process data set in the process table corresponding to the background symbol variation pattern. When the right background symbol fluctuates at a high speed and 5 seconds have elapsed, the left and right background symbols are stopped and displayed in a state of being aligned, and thereafter, the background symbol display unit 9c is controlled to execute the reach effect. The production control CPU 101 displays the types of the left and right background symbols that are stopped and displayed in the aligned state when the variation due to the background symbol variation pattern is started, when the left and right background symbols are aligned and stopped, Alternatively, it can be determined by a lottery using a random number, for example, at an earlier time point. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 63, switching of background symbol variation (for example, from the variation of the background symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the first ornament symbol, corresponding to the second special symbol and the second ornament symbol) When the background symbol change is performed), it may be determined when the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. However, at the time when the change of the background symbol is changed, the corresponding decorative symbol is displayed. You may make it determine the stop symbol according to the display result command received related.

  FIG. 64 shows an example in which the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the background symbol A is longer than the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the background symbol B at the switching point. Further, it is assumed that the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the background pattern A is 20 seconds. Further, an example is shown in which the values of the first start winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are 0 and the value of the difference counter is a non-zero value.

  In that case, when the switching point is reached (see step S944 in FIG. 60), the value of the total variation time timer (corresponding to the remaining time of the variation time of background symbol A) is the value of background symbol variation time timer B. It is confirmed that the value is larger than the value (corresponding to the remaining time of the variation time of the background symbol B) (see step S966 in FIG. 61), the background symbol variation pattern is selected (see step S969), and the variation of the background symbol is continued. . The continued background symbol variation corresponds to the first special symbol variation and the first decorative symbol variation. In this embodiment, when the variation of the background symbol that is continued corresponds to the variation of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, that is, when switching to the variation of the background symbol B is not performed, Do not subtract the total number of pending storage at the switching point.

  Further, if the values of the first starting winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are 0 and the value of the difference counter is not 0 when the change of the background symbol is completed, the background is again displayed. The change of the symbol is started (see step S915 in FIG. 57). In this way, the dummy pending storage is digested.

  In FIG. 65, the stop symbol of the variation of the decorative symbol (in this example, the second decorative symbol) indicated by the new variation pattern command (in this example, the second variable pattern command) determined in step S949 is a jackpot symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the case where it is within predetermined time with respect to the time of the end of the fluctuation | variation of the background design A at the time of the end of the change of the decoration design. If the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the second special symbol is also a jackpot symbol.

  In that case, the effect control CPU 101 controls to continue the change of the background symbol A at the switching point (see steps S966 and S969 in FIG. 61), but the background symbol jackpot display flag is set in step S972. set. Then, in the background symbol stop process, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background symbol stop symbol to the jackpot symbol when the background symbol jackpot display flag is set. In this embodiment, after the display result (stop symbol) of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol is determined to be a jackpot symbol, at least in a specific period until the display result is derived and displayed. Variations in the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that make the jackpot symbol are not started. In addition, after determining that the display result of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol is a jackpot symbol, at least in a specific period until the display result is derived and displayed, the first special symbol that makes the display result a jackpot symbol and The variation of the first decorative pattern is not started. Therefore, the change of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that makes the stop symbol a big hit symbol and the change of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that makes the stop symbol a big hit symbol are not executed at the same time. The fact that the variation of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol, which makes the symbol a big hit symbol, has started, is a deviating symbol from the stop of the variation of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol.

  In the example shown in FIG. 65, the change in the background symbol executed after the switching point corresponds to the change in the first decorative symbol. Therefore, the background symbol should be changed from the stop symbol to the background symbol, but if controlled in this way, the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, the big hit symbol). The time until the jackpot game is started after being displayed and displayed (for example, 1 second), the jackpot game is started, but the stop symbol of the background symbol that is easy to be visually recognized by the player is out of the design. And the player may feel suspicious. However, such a possibility can be eliminated by controlling as illustrated in FIG.

  In FIG. 66, the stop symbol of the variation of the decorative symbol (in this example, the second decorative symbol) indicated by the new variation pattern command (in this example, the second variable pattern command) determined in step S949 is a jackpot symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the case where predetermined time is exceeded with respect to the time of the end of the fluctuation | variation of the background design A at the time of the end of the change of the decoration design.

  In that case, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the fluctuation of the background symbol A is continued at the switching point (see steps S966 and S969 in FIG. 61), but the background symbol stop request flag is set in step S973. set. When the background symbol stop request flag is set in the background symbol stop process, the effect control CPU 101 stops the background symbol variation when the second decoration diagram variation is stopped, and the background symbol stop symbol is stopped. Is changed to a jackpot symbol.

  In the example shown in FIG. 66, the change of the background symbol executed past the switching point corresponds to the change of the first decorative symbol. Therefore, the change of the stop symbol should be ended when the stop symbol is derived and displayed on the first decorative symbol, and the stop symbol of the background symbol should be changed to the off symbol. The jackpot game will start in response to the stop symbol of the special symbol and the second decorative symbol being a jackpot symbol, but the stop symbol of the background symbol that is easily visible to the player during the jackpot game There is a possibility that the player will have a suspicious feeling. However, such a possibility can be eliminated by controlling as illustrated in FIG.

  67 and 68 are flowcharts showing the background symbol changing (second half) processing (step S904). In the background symbol variation (second half) processing, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the value of the total variation time timer by -1 (step S611). Then, it is checked whether or not the total variation time timer has timed out (the value of the total variation time timer has become 0) (step S612). If the total variation time timer has timed out, the background symbol process The flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol stop process (step S905) (step S613).

  If the total variation time timer has not timed out, it is confirmed whether or not the background symbol stop request flag (see step S973 and step S636) is set. If not, the process proceeds to step S616. When the background symbol stop request flag is set, a decorative symbol (this is a second variation pattern command (in this example, refer to the second variation pattern command, step S620 and step S949 in FIG. 60)) is received. In the example, it is confirmed whether or not the variation of the second decorative symbols has been completed (step S615). It should be noted that whether or not the decorative symbol variation based on the reception of the new variation pattern command has ended is, for example, that the second decorative symbol stop designation command has been received or the value of the second decorative symbol process flag is Judgment is made by changing to a value corresponding to the two decoration symbol stop process.

  When the decoration symbol variation based on the reception of the new variation pattern command is completed, the effect control CPU 101 stops the variation of the background symbol and resets the background symbol stop request flag (step S626). The background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol stop process (step S906) (step S627).

  In step S616, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the value of the process timer by -1. When the process timer times out (when the value reaches 0), the process data is switched (steps S617 and S618). That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer, and the rendering device (variable) is set based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next. The control state for the display device 9 or the like is changed.

  If the process data after switching is data indicating temporary stop, the value of the summation pending storage counter and the value of the difference counter are decremented by 1 (step S619). That is, the dummy reserved memory is digested.

  In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control uses a new variation pattern command (in this example, when the variation of the background symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol is performed, the second variation pattern command, the second If the background symbol corresponding to the special symbol and the second decorative symbol has been changed, it is confirmed whether or not the first changing pattern command) has been received (step S620), and if received, the process proceeds to step S630. To do.

  In step S630, the CPU 101 for effect control controls the background symbol (if the background symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol is changed, the background symbol A, the second special symbol, and the second decorative symbol). If the background symbol corresponding to is changed, it is confirmed whether the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the background symbol B) is determined as the big hit symbol. If the big hit symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S632. If the jackpot symbol has not been determined, the value of the total variation time timer (corresponding to the remaining time of the variation time of the background symbol) is compared with the variation time of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol indicated by the newly received variation pattern command. To do. If the value of the total variation time timer is larger, the process proceeds to step S632. When the variation time of the decorative pattern variation pattern indicated by the newly received variation pattern command is longer (longer), the process proceeds to step S637.

  When the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the background symbol (for example, background symbol A) already executed is determined as the big hit symbol by the process of step S630, the variation of the background symbol A Will be continued. In this case, there is a case where the decoration pattern indicated by the newly received variation pattern command is later at the end of variation than the decoration pattern corresponding to the variation of the background pattern A that has been executed. In this embodiment, in such a case, when the variation of the background symbol A is finished, the variable display device 9 performs an effect related to the big hit game. Then, while the big hit game is being executed, the variation of the decorative symbol (in this example, the second decorative symbol) corresponding to the variation of the background symbol B is interrupted. Thereafter, when the big hit game ends, the variation of the decorative symbol (in this example, the second decorative symbol) corresponding to the variation of the background symbol B is resumed. However, for example, even if the variation of the second decorative symbol is resumed, the variation of the background symbol B corresponding to the variation of the second decorative symbol is not resumed. In such a case, the difference counter is incremented by 1 in the process of step S632, so that the background symbol change is started again based on the determination of step S915. However, after the big hit game executed in response to the stop symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the background symbol A (in this example, the first decorative symbol) being the big hit symbol, the variation of the background symbol B is changed. You may make it resume.

  In the processing after step S637, when the variation time of the variation pattern of the decorative pattern indicated by the newly received variation pattern command is longer, the variation of the background symbol is changed to that of the decorative symbol indicated by the newly received variation pattern command. Control for switching to a variation corresponding to the variation (variation of background symbol B) is performed. Specifically, first, the background symbol is temporarily stopped (step S637), the variation time of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol indicated by the newly received variation pattern command is set in the total variation time timer (step S638), and the summation is suspended. The value of the storage display counter is decremented by 1 (step S639).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the value of the difference counter (step S640). If the value of the difference counter is not 0, the background symbol variation pattern including the temporary stop mode is selected from the background symbol variation patterns having the variation time corresponding to the value in the overall variation time timer (step S641). If the value of the difference counter is 0, a background symbol variation pattern that does not include a temporary stop mode is selected from the background symbol variation patterns having a variation time corresponding to the value in the overall variation time timer (step S642). ). The background symbol variation pattern selected in the process of step S642 is No. 1 (in the case of normal fluctuation), No. 1 4 * (when the fluctuation time is 20 seconds), No. 6 * (when the variation pattern is 30 seconds) or No. 8 * (when the variation time is 40 seconds). The background symbol variation pattern selected in the process of step S641 is No. 9 (in the case of normal fluctuation), No. 13 * (when the variation time is 20 seconds), No. 15 * (when the fluctuation pattern is 30 seconds), or No. 17 * (when the variation time is 40 seconds). When temporarily stopping, the value of the sum hold storage display counter and the value of the difference counter are decremented by 1 to digest the dummy hold storage. When the value of the difference counter is 2 or more, a background symbol variation pattern in which a temporary stop is performed a plurality of times (for example, twice) in the variation pattern is used. In this case, a plurality of values of the summation pending storage display counter and the difference counter are subtracted before the fluctuation time ends. In this embodiment, when a new variation pattern command is received after the switching point, it is determined whether or not the background symbol variation is switched immediately. When the variation time indicated by the new variation pattern command is longer, the background Although the change of the symbol is switched, the control may be performed so that the change of the background symbol can be switched only at the switching point. By performing such control, the background symbol can be switched more naturally. In this case, when a new variation pattern command is received after the switching point, a new variation pattern is generated based on the fact that the value of the difference counter is not 0 after the variation of the changing background symbol is completed. You may make it start the fluctuation | variation of the background symbol corresponding to. In addition, when a plurality of switching points are provided in advance and the background symbol has a long variation time, when any new variation pattern command is received, one of the switching points that have not yet elapsed The background design may be switched with.

  Then, a process table corresponding to the background pattern variation pattern to be used is selected (step S643). Then, the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S644). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device (variable display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step S645).

  In step S632, the production control CPU 101 increments the value of the difference counter by +1. In this embodiment, when the change of the background symbol is not switched to the variation of the background symbol B (that is, when it becomes “total variation time timer” in the determination of step S631), the total pending storage number is not decreased by −1. Moreover, since the second reserved memory number is decremented by −1 in the second decorative symbol process, the dummy reserved memory is substantially increased by one.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the decoration symbol indicated by the new variation pattern command (in this example, the second variation pattern command) determined in step S620 is a big hit symbol (step S633). If it is not a big hit symbol, the process ends. In the case of a big hit symbol, at the end of the variation of the decorative symbol, a predetermined time with respect to the end of the variation of the background symbol A (the background symbol that is currently fluctuating, ie, the background symbol that is stopped when the total variation time timer times out) It is confirmed whether it is within (step S634). If it is within the predetermined time, the background symbol jackpot display flag is set (step S635), and if it exceeds the predetermined time, the background symbol stop request flag is set (step S636). If it is determined in step S631 that the total variation time timer is longer and the determination in step S633 is “N”, a background symbol variation pattern including a temporary stop mode may be selected. Good.

  In this embodiment, the predetermined time corresponds to the jackpot display time (the value of the first jackpot display time timer set in step S184 in the first jackpot symbol stop process shown in FIG. 37, the second jackpot symbol stop. The processing is equivalent to the value of the second big hit display time timer set in the processing corresponding to the processing in step S184). That is, it is the time from when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed until the big hit game is started.

  FIG. 69 to FIG. 71 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of background symbol variation caused by the background symbol variation (second half) process by the effect control CPU 101.

  In FIG. 69, when a new variation pattern command is received, the background of the variation time of the background symbol A (same as the remaining time of the variation time of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol) is displayed. Variation in background symbol (the variation in the background symbol on the assumption that it has started based on the reception of a new variation pattern command as described above. The variation in the background symbol B is not made at the point of switching). An example is shown in which the variation time of 2 special symbols and the second decorative symbol is longer).

  In that case, the CPU 101 for effect control continues to change the background symbol A at the switching point, and when receiving a new variation pattern command, decrements the total number of pending storage by -1, and selects the background symbol variation pattern ( 68), the background symbol variation is continued. The continued background symbol variation corresponds to the variation of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol.

  FIG. 70 shows that the stop symbol of the decoration symbol (in this example, the second ornament symbol) indicated by the new variation pattern command (in this example, the second variation pattern command) is the jackpot symbol, and the variation of the ornament symbol It is explanatory drawing which shows the case where it is less than predetermined time with respect to the time of the end of the fluctuation | variation of the background symbol A at the time of completion | finish. If the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the second special symbol is also a jackpot symbol.

  In this case, the effect control CPU 101 controls to continue the fluctuation of the background symbol A even when a new fluctuation pattern command is received (the determination result in step S631 in FIG. 68 is “total fluctuation time timer”). When the background symbol variation is reached, the background symbol variation pattern is not selected again), and the background symbol jackpot display flag is set in step S635. Then, in the background symbol stop process, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background symbol stop symbol to the jackpot symbol when the background symbol jackpot display flag is set. In this embodiment, after the display result (stop symbol) of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol is determined to be a jackpot symbol, at least in a specific period until the display result is derived and displayed. Variations in the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that make the jackpot symbol are not started. In addition, after determining that the display result of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol is a jackpot symbol, at least in a specific period until the display result is derived and displayed, the first special symbol that makes the display result a jackpot symbol and The variation of the first decorative pattern is not started. Therefore, the change of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol that makes the stop symbol a big hit symbol and the change of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol that makes the stop symbol a big hit symbol are not executed at the same time. The fact that the variation of the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol, which makes the symbol a big hit symbol, has started, is a deviating symbol from the stop of the variation of the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 71, the stop symbol of the variation of the decorative symbol (in this example, the second decorative symbol) indicated by the new variation pattern command (in this example, the second variable pattern command) determined in step S620 is a jackpot symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the case where predetermined time is exceeded with respect to the time of the end of the fluctuation | variation of the background design A at the time of the end of the change of the decoration design.

  In that case, the effect control CPU 101 controls to continue the fluctuation of the background symbol A, but sets the background symbol stop request flag in the process of step S636. Then, when the background symbol stop request flag is set in the background symbol variation (second half) processing, the effect control CPU 101 stops the variation of the background symbol when the second ornament symbol variation is stopped, The background symbol stop symbol is changed to a jackpot symbol (see step S652 in FIG. 74).

  72 and 73 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of variable display of the background symbols on the background symbol display unit 9c in the variable display device 9. FIG. In this embodiment, it is possible to display the decorative symbols in parallel on the two variable display parts, the first variable display part 9a and the second variable display part 9b. 72 and 73, the display state transitions in numerical order as (1) (2) (3). 72 and 73, an arrow as a decorative design and a background design indicates that the decorative design and the background design are changing. As described above, the display effects as illustrated in FIGS. 72 and 73 are executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the effect control command sent from the game control microcomputer 560.

  In FIG. 72, at the time of (1), the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is executed in parallel on both the first variable display portion 9a and the second variable display portion 9b. In addition, the background symbol display unit 9c performs variable display of the background symbol corresponding to either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol. As shown in (2), the variable display (fluctuation) of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a ends before the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b and stops ( Outlier symbol) is derived and displayed. When the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the first variable display portion 9a, the variable display of the first decorative symbol can be started, so the CPU 56 performs a big hit determination for the next variable display ( Step S62). Assume that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  Thereafter, an example is shown in which the variable display of the second decorative symbol in the second variable display portion 9b is terminated, a stop symbol is derived, and a new variable display is started ((3), (4)). In this embodiment, the variable display started from the time point (4) is determined to be out of force. Note that the variable display started from the time point (8) is also determined to be out of force.

  At the time of (9), the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display portion 9a is finished, and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first variable display portion 9a and the background symbol display portion 9c. Then, the background symbol display unit 9c performs a display for notifying the big hit (see (10)). At that time, if the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the second variable display portion 9b, the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display portion 9b is interrupted as shown in (9). The Then, the shifted symbols are stopped and displayed on the second variable display portion 9b (steps S822, S823, and S824 in FIG. 52 (however, “second” is replaced with “first” in steps S822 and S823, and “first” Is read as “second”.)). Thereafter, it is shown that the jackpot game is being executed ((11) to (12)). FIG. 73 shows an example in which the variable display of the second decorative symbol is resumed when the big hit game ends (see (13), steps S831, S832, and S833 in FIG. 52 (however, step S831). , S832, “second” is read as “first”, and “first” is read as “second”).

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the background symbol stop process (step S905). In the background symbol stop process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the jackpot symbol of the background symbol has already been derived and displayed. If it is already derived and displayed, the process proceeds to step S653. If the background symbol jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed, it is checked whether or not the background symbol jackpot display flag (see step S972 in FIG. 61 and step S635 in FIG. 68) is set (step S651). If the background symbol jackpot display flag is set, the background symbol jackpot display flag is reset (step S651B), and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the background symbol display unit 9c (step S652). In step S652, the effect control CPU 101 derives and displays the stop symbol determined in step S920 when the background symbol variation is not switched, but the background symbol variation is switched. In this case, instead of the stop symbol determined in step S920, a stop symbol of the background symbol corresponding to the result of the variation of the decorative symbol corresponding to the change of the background symbol after the switching (outlier symbol or jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. To control. When the background symbol variation switching is performed, if the decoration symbol variation corresponding to the background symbol variation after the switching is a jackpot symbol, in step S920, the off symbol is determined as the background symbol stop symbol. Has been. In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol whose display result is a big hit symbol and the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol whose display result is a big hit symbol are not simultaneously executed. It is because it is controlled by. Therefore, when the background symbol variation is switched and the result of the variation of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the background symbol after the switching is the jackpot symbol, the background symbol stop symbol (determined in step S920) The missed symbol) is replaced with the jackpot symbol and displayed. In addition, the background symbol stop symbol (out-of-order symbol) determined in step S920 is replaced with the jackpot symbol and is displayed for display, although the background symbol variation is not switched. The same applies when the big hit display flag is set (see steps S972 and S635).

  When the background symbol jackpot display flag is not set, the CPU 101 for effect control determines whether or not the stopped symbol of the background symbol that has been changed is used as the jackpot symbol (step S655). For example, when the background symbol is changed corresponding to the change of the first decorative symbol, when the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol is a big hit symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is also a big hit symbol. When the stop symbol of the background symbol is a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step S652, and the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed.

  When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the fanfare flag is set (step S652a). When the fanfare flag is set (Y in step S652a), the effect control CPU 101 selects a fanfare effect for big hit based on the contents of the stored fanfare command (step S652b).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects process data corresponding to the fanfare effect selected in step S652b (step S652c). Then, the process timer is started (step S652d).

  When the stop symbol of the background symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the background symbol display unit 9c derives and displays the shifted symbol (step S656), and the background symbol process flag is set according to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900). The value is updated (step S657).

  In step S653, a big hit start designation command (if the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a result of the change of the background symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, the first big hit designation command, the second special symbol, and the second ornament is displayed. If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a result of the fluctuation of the background symbol corresponding to the symbol, it is confirmed whether or not the second jackpot designation command is received, and if received, the background symbol process flag is displayed as a jackpot The value is updated according to the process (step S906) (step S654). The specific time (for example, the time from when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b until the big hit gaming state is started) is predetermined, but the first special symbol and the first decoration When the time when the background symbol variation corresponding to the symbol stops and the time when the jackpot gaming state is started are close, the period during which the background symbol jackpot symbol is stopped (see step S652) is short. Become. In that case, the period during which the jackpot symbol is forcibly stopped is lengthened (for example, 0.5 seconds or longer. The time during which the big hit game process in step S907 is executed is shortened accordingly). It is preferable. In order to realize such control, the effect control CPU 101 sets, for example, a timer that measures 0.5 seconds when the background symbol stop process is started, and designates a big hit start before the timer times out. When the command (or the display command for opening the big winning opening for the first round) is received, the period during which the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed may be lengthened. The specific time may be shorter than the time from when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b until the big hit gaming state is started. In such a case, for example, it is often determined as “N” in the process of step 971. However, when it is determined as “Y”, the time when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed is a specific time. It becomes longer by the shortened amount.

  75 and 76 are flowcharts showing the jackpot display process (step S906) in the background symbol process. In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not an ending flag indicating that the ending command has been received is set (step S1900). The ending flag is set in the command analysis process based on the reception of the ending command when the 15th round ends.

  If the ending flag is not set (N in step S1900), the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the big prize opening opening flag indicating that the big prize opening opening display command has been received is set. (Step S1901). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S1901), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S902), and the effect device (variable display) is performed according to the contents of the process data n. Control of the apparatus 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S1903). For example, the variable display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and produces an effect of displaying a character or character indicating that a jackpot has occurred. At this time, if the contents of the symbol / effect designation command and the fanfare command do not match, a specific symbol (“???”) is displayed as the jackpot display symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S1906).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S1901), the production control CPU 101 produces the round presentation (the round display corresponding to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the big prize opening open display command. An effect to be executed is selected (step S1907). Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S1908), and the process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S1909). Then, the process timer is started (step S1910), and the value of the background symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S907) (step S1911).

When the ending flag is set in step S1900 (Y in step S1900: when the ending flag is set based on reception of the ending command), the effect control CPU 101 determines the ending based on the content of the ending command. An effect is selected (step S1912). Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the contents of the symbol / effect designation command and the contents of the ending command are the same with respect to execution / non-execution of the re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit game (step S1913). ).
Normally, the contents of the symbol / effect designating command and the contents of the ending command should match. However, it may happen that the content of the symbol / effect designating command does not match the content of the ending command. In this case, garbled data or the like has occurred in the process from the transmission from the game control microcomputer 60 to the reception of the effect control microcomputer 101 for either the symbol / effect designation command or the ending command. It can be considered that the command has changed to a command having a different content from the original command.

  At this time, if the ending effect is executed based on the wrong ending command, the re-lottery effect is not performed or the re-lottery effect is executed even though the re-lottery effect should have been originally executed in the ending effect. Although it shouldn't, the re-drawing effect will be executed. In this embodiment, the execution time of the ending effect when the re-lottery effect is not executed is set to be shorter than the execution time of the ending effect when the re-lottery effect is executed. Therefore, when an ending effect with a long execution time is being executed, a symbol / effect designation command or a variation pattern command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560, or conversely, an ending effect with a short execution time is ended. Thereafter, since the symbol / effect designation command is not transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560, the end screen of the ending effect is displayed for a while.

  Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when it is determined that the contents of the symbol / effect designation command do not match the contents of the ending command (N in step S1913), the effect control CPU 101 determines in step S1914. The ending effect selected in step 1 is changed to a special ending effect prepared in advance (step S1914). This special ending effect is an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity and can be finished at any timing. Also, it is preferable not to indicate whether the big hit is a probable big hit or a normal big hit. Thereby, the consistency of control between the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control CPU 101 can be ensured without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets the ending flag (step S1915), and selects process data corresponding to the ending effect (step S1916). Then, the process timer is started (step S1917), and the value of the background symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S909) (step S1918).

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing mid-round processing (step S907) in the background symbol process. In the in-round processing, the production control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the ending flag is set (step S1921). When the ending flag is not set (N in step S1921), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the flag after opening the big prize opening indicating that the display command after opening the big prize opening is received is set. (Step S1922). When the flag after opening the big prize opening is not set (N in Step S1922), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (Step S1923), and the effect device (variable display) is performed according to the contents of the process data n. Control of the apparatus 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S1924). For example, the variable display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and executes an effect of displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like. At this time, if the contents of the symbol / effect designation command and the fanfare command do not match, a specific symbol (“???”) is displayed as the jackpot display symbol.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1925), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1926). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1927).

  When the flag after opening the big prize opening is set in step S1922 (Y in step S1922), the effect control CPU 101 uses the interval effect (the interval corresponding to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the display command after the big prize opening is opened. A display effect) is selected (step S1928). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the flag after opening the special winning opening (step S1929), and selects process data corresponding to the selected interval effect (step S1930). Then, the process timer is started (step S1931), and the value of the background symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S908) (step S1932).

  When the ending flag is set in step S1921 (Y in step S1921), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not execution of the re-lottery effect is specified, and if execution of the re-lottery effect is specified. (Y in step S1933), a process of determining and storing a jackpot confirmed symbol of the background symbol displayed on the variable display device 9 is performed (step S1934). The jackpot confirmed symbol refers to a jackpot symbol of the background symbol that is finally stopped and displayed (derived display) after the re-lottery effect during the ending effect is executed.

  Specifically, the production control CPU 101 recognizes what symbol should be used as the jackpot determined symbol based on the content of the ending command. Then, a jackpot fixed symbol determination table for a short-time symbol, a jackpot fixed symbol determination table for a probability variable symbol, and a jackpot fixed symbol determination table for a probability variable short symbol, in which a plurality of judgment values are set corresponding to each symbol, Is prepared in advance. The effect control CPU 101 recognizes what kind of symbol should be determined as the jackpot determined symbol, and then selects the jackpot determined symbol determination table. Then, the jackpot fixed symbol determining random number is extracted, and the symbol associated with the determination value that matches the extracted jackpot fixed symbol determining random value is determined as the jackpot fixed symbol. Then, the production control CPU 101 stores the determined jackpot determined symbol in the jackpot determined symbol storage area in the RAM.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects an ending effect based on the determined jackpot determination symbol and the content of the ending command (step S1935). Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the contents of the symbol / effect designation command and the contents of the ending command are the same regarding the execution / non-execution of the re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit game (step S1936). ).

  When it is determined that the content of the symbol / effect designating command does not match the content of the ending command (N in step S1936), the effect control CPU 101 prepares the ending effect selected in step S1935 in advance. Change to a special ending effect (step S1937). As described above, this special ending effect is an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity and can be finished at any timing. Also, it is preferable not to indicate whether the big hit is a probable big hit or a normal big hit.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets the ending flag (step S1938), and selects process data corresponding to the ending effect (step S1939). Then, the process timer is started (step S1940), and the value of the background symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S909) (step S1941).

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing post-round processing (step S908) in the background symbol process. In the round post-processing, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open display command has been received is set (step S1951). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in Step S1951), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (Step S1952), and the effect device (variable display) is performed according to the contents of the process data n. Control of the apparatus 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) is executed (step S1953). For example, the variable display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and produces an effect of displaying a predetermined character or the like. At this time, if the contents of the symbol / effect designation command and the fanfare command do not match, a specific symbol (“???”) is displayed as the jackpot display symbol.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1954), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1955). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1956).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S1951), the production control CPU 101 produces the round presentation (the round display corresponding to the number of rounds) based on the contents of the big prize opening open display command. An effect to be executed is selected (step S1957). Next, the special winning opening open flag is reset (step S1958), and the process data corresponding to the effect during the round is selected (step S1959). Then, the process timer is started (step S1960), and the value of the background symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S907) (step S1961).

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S909) in the background symbol process. In the big hit end process, the production control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the big hit end flag indicating that the big hit ends is set (step S1971). The jackpot end flag is set when a jackpot end designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the command analysis process.

  When the big hit end flag is not set (N in Step S1971), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (Step S1972), and according to the contents of the process data n, the effect device (variable display device 9, Processing for controlling the speaker 27 and the like is executed (step S1973). For example, when it is displayed that the normal big hit, hourly big hit, probability variation big hit or probability variation big hit is completed, or execution of the re-lottery effect is specified in the ending command, the re-lottery effect is executed. Further, when the contents of the symbol / effect designation command and the contents of the ending command do not match, the special ending effect described above is executed. Although not shown in FIG. 77, in the re-lottery effect, as in the re-lottery effect before the start of the big hit game, the non-probable variable symbol is promoted to a probable variable symbol in response to the player's repeated stroke of the symbol promotion button 120. Promotion promotion may be executed.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1974), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1975). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S1976).

  When the jackpot end flag is set (Y in step S1971), the effect control CPU 101 resets predetermined flags such as the jackpot effect flag (step S1977), and waits for the background symbol variation start to be set. A value corresponding to the process (step S900) is set (step S1978).

  Next, the effect aspect of the lottery symbol re-drawing effect executed in the variable display device 9 will be described. FIG. 80 and FIG. 81 are explanatory diagrams showing display examples of jackpot symbols re-lottering effects executed in the variable display device 9 (for example, the background symbol display unit 9c). In FIG. 80 and FIG. 81, the display state transitions in numerical order as (1) (2) (3). Further, the display effects as illustrated in FIGS. 80 and 81 are executed based on the effect control command sent from the game control microcomputer 560 by the effect control microcomputer 100.

  As a precondition, it is assumed that the game control microcomputer 560 determines that it is a big hit in the big hit determination and determines that it is a probable big hit. Further, it is assumed that it is determined not to execute the re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit game. In response to this, a probability variation jackpot designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 receives the probability variation jackpot designation command and sets the probability variation jackpot effect flag. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command to save the variation pattern and sets the variation pattern reception flag. Furthermore, the temporary stop symbol of the background symbol is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (1), when a predetermined time elapses after the variation of the background symbol (variable display) is started in the variable display device 9, the variation is temporarily stopped and the jackpot symbol of the non-probability variation symbol (normal symbol) is displayed. (Temporary stop symbol) is displayed as a temporary stop. In the example shown in (1), the non-probable variation pattern “222” is displayed temporarily. Thereafter, the re-lottery effect of the big hit symbol is started.

  When the re-lottery effect of the big hit symbol is started and the promotion effect is started, a meter is displayed on the screen of the variable display device 9 as shown in (2). In addition, if you want to promote “2” and “4” to a probable symbol on the screen of the variable display device 9, press the button repeatedly! ! Is displayed. From this point, measurement of the promotion effective period (for example, 5 seconds) is started. In accordance with the sentence with the content shown in (2), the player hits the symbol promotion button 120 repeatedly.

  As shown in (3), in response to the player pressing (operating) the symbol promotion button 120, display is performed such that the level of the meter gradually increases. As shown in (4), when the level of the meter rises to the maximum within the promotion effective period (for example, 5 seconds) (that is, when the symbol promotion button 120 which is the promotion condition is pressed 10 times), it changes after the promotion effective period elapses. A sentence ““ 2 ”and“ 4 ”are promoted to a probable symbol” is displayed on the screen of the display device 9 (steps S852 and S853). Such a display corresponds to a display of symbol promotion. The color of the non-probable variation pattern may be changed so as to approach the color of the probabilistic variation pattern according to the meter level. According to such a configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize whether or not the symbol is likely to be promoted.

  Thereafter, when the execution time of the big hit symbol determination effect is reached, the big hit display symbol of the background symbol that is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol is determined. Then, the big hit symbol determination effect is started. When the big hit symbol determination effect is started, as shown in FIG. 79 (5), the variation of all symbols is started in a state in which the left, middle and right background symbols are aligned with the same symbol. At this time, the probability variation symbol and the non-probability variation symbol are displayed separately so that the player can clearly see the probability variation symbol and the non-probability variation symbol. For example, the probability variation symbol and the non-probability variation symbol are displayed in different forms, or the probability variation symbol and the non-probability variation symbol are displayed in different colors (for example, the probability variation symbol is red and the non-probability variation symbol is blue). The symbol promoted in the promotion effect is displayed as a probability variation symbol. Specifically, symbols “2” and “4” that have been promoted to probability variation symbols in the promotion effect are displayed as probability variation symbols.

  Thereafter, as shown in (6), the jackpot display symbol is stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, the left middle right symbol “222”, which has been promoted to the probability variation symbol, is displayed in a state of being aligned. Thereby, as shown in (7), the probability variation big hit is fixed. Then, after the big hit game is over, the game state is controlled to the probability change state.

  Next, a description will be given of the effect of the re-lottering effect on the jackpot symbol when the probability variation symbol on the variable display device 9 is demoted to a non-probability variation symbol. FIG. 82 and FIG. 83 are explanatory diagrams showing a display example of the re-lottering effect of the jackpot symbol when the probability variation symbol is demoted to a non-probability variation symbol. 82 and 83, the display state transitions in numerical order as (1) (2) (3). The display effects as illustrated in FIGS. 82 and 83 are executed based on the effect control command sent from the game control microcomputer 560 by the effect control microcomputer 100.

  As a precondition, it is assumed that the game control microcomputer 560 determines that a big hit is made in the jackpot determination, and determines a non-probable variation symbol (normal symbol) as the big hit symbol. Further, it is assumed that it is determined not to execute the re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit game. In response to this, a normal jackpot designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 sets the normal jackpot effect flag by receiving the normal jackpot designation command. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command to save the variation pattern and sets the variation pattern reception flag. Furthermore, the temporary stop symbol of the background symbol is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (1), when a predetermined time elapses after the variation of the background symbol (variable display) is started in the variable display device 9, the variation is temporarily stopped and the jackpot symbol of the non-probability variation symbol (normal symbol) is displayed. (Temporary stop symbol) is displayed as a temporary stop. In the example shown in (1), the non-probable variation pattern “222” is displayed temporarily. Thereafter, the re-lottery effect of the big hit symbol is started.

  When the re-lottery effect of the big hit symbol is started and the promotion effect is started, a meter is displayed on the screen of the variable display device 9 as shown in (2). In addition, if you want to promote “2” and “4” to a probable symbol on the screen of the variable display device 9, press the button repeatedly! ! Is displayed. From this point, measurement of the promotion effective period (for example, 5 seconds) is started. If the probability variation symbol to be demoted is also determined, the probability variation symbol “7” to be demoted is also displayed on the screen of the variable display device 9 as a display symbol. For example, press the button if you do not want to demote “7” to a non-probable variable on the variable display 9 screen! "Is displayed.

  Here, as shown in (3), when the player does not press the symbol promotion button 120 at all, not only the promotion condition is satisfied but also the demotion condition is satisfied as the promotion effective period elapses. As a result, as shown in (4), after the promotion effective period has elapsed, the sentence “Time over, unfortunate !!“ 7 is demoted to an uncertain variable ”is displayed on the screen of the variable display device 9. Such a display corresponds to the display of symbol demotion.

  Thereafter, the jackpot symbol determination effect is started. When the big hit symbol determination effect is started, as shown in FIG. 83 (5), the variation of all symbols is started in a state where the left middle right background symbols are aligned with the same symbol. At this time, the probability variation symbol and the non-probability variation symbol are displayed separately so that the player can clearly see the probability variation symbol and the non-probability variation symbol. In addition, a symbol that has not been promoted in the promotion effect and has been demoted to a non-probable variation due to the demotion is displayed as a non-probable variation. Specifically, the symbol “7” demoted to the non-probable variable symbol in the promotion effect is displayed as the non-probable variable symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in (6), the jackpot display symbol is stopped and displayed on the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, the left middle right symbol “777” demoted to the non-probable variation symbol is displayed in a state of being aligned. As a result, as shown in (7), a non-probable variation big hit (normal big hit) is established. Then, when the gaming state is controlled to the probability changing state, the game state is shifted to the normal gaming state after the big hit game is finished.

  As described above, when it is not confirmed that the player has pressed the symbol promotion button 120 once in the promotion effective period, it is determined that the demoting condition is satisfied (Y in step S854). When it is determined that a probable big hit will be made (Y in step S117 or Y in step S123), if all of the probable symbols are demoted to non-probable symbols, the non-probable big hit (normal big hit) has been established Therefore, at least one of the probability variation symbols must not be demoted to a non-probability variation symbol. In order to realize this, for example, at least one of the probability variation symbols (for example, “5”) may be determined in advance as not demoted to the non-probability variation symbol.

  As described above, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the value of the summation pending storage display counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (4 in this example). If it is determined that the value of the total pending storage display counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the first special symbol (first decorative symbol) or the second special symbol (second decorative symbol) is started after the variable symbol display is started. The variable display time until the background symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of symbol) is derived and displayed on the background symbol display unit 9c is shortened. Therefore, even if the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, a shortening variation occurs during variable display of either the first special symbol (first decorative symbol) or the second special symbol (second decorative symbol). However, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the shortening variation is not performed during the other variable display. Therefore, the variable display can be shortened and changed in accordance with the number of starting memories in the background symbol display section 9c.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 displays background symbols corresponding to variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a. After starting the display effect in the unit 9c, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are started, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the display effect on the background symbol display unit 9c is finished within a predetermined time from the time when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a display result on the display unit 8b and the second variable display unit 9b, when the variation time of the background symbol has elapsed Next, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the background symbol display unit 9c. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the big hit game from being suddenly started before the player is informed at all about the variable display in the second special symbol display 8b and the second variable display portion 9b. It can prevent suspicious feeling.

  In addition, after starting the display effect in the background symbol display unit 9c corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the first variable display unit 9a, The variable display of the second special symbol on the special symbol display unit 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are started and displayed on the second special symbol display unit 8b and the second variable display unit 9b. As a result, when the display effect on the background symbol display unit 9c is terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time point when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot symbol is derived to the second special symbol display unit 8b and the second variable display unit 9b. At the time of display, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the background symbol display unit 9c. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the big hit game from being suddenly started before the player is informed at all about the variable display in the second special symbol display 8b and the second variable display portion 9b. It can prevent suspicious feeling.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to a special gaming state (short-time state or probability variation state), it is determined in advance at the start of variable display of identification information in any one of a plurality of variable display units. When it is determined by the means that the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied (when it is determined that the big hit is normal in step S208), it is determined whether or not the special gaming state is set at the start of variable display of the identification information. The special gaming state is terminated by setting the state data to be indicated to the non-special state data. Therefore, the end of the special game state can be immediately reflected in the game control in the other variable display unit, and as a result, a fair game machine can be provided.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the above embodiment, the symbol hold storage display unit 18c has eight display areas, and the upper limit value of the combined hold storage number is fixed to a predetermined value (8 in the above embodiment). You may make it change the upper limit of a number with a game state. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram of a display example of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c when the upper limit value of the combined hold storage number is changed.

  In this embodiment, in the probability variation state, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), the upper limit value of the total reserved memory number is set to 8, and eight display areas are displayed on the symbol reserved memory display unit 18c. That is, the same control as in the first embodiment is performed. However, in the normal state (including the time reduction state), as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the upper limit value of the combined reserved storage number is set to 4, and four display areas are displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c.

  As described above, in the probability variation state, the normal symbol display 10 has a higher probability that the stop symbol becomes a winning symbol than the normal state, and one or both of the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball device 15. Is raised from the normal state, which is more advantageous for the player. That is, in the probability variation state, there is a high possibility that a game ball will win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in the probability variation state, the upper limit value of the total pending storage number is increased. By executing such control, it is possible to make the player feel as if the total number has increased, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In order to realize such control, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the probability change state designation command from the game control microcomputer 560 and confirms that the game state is the probability change state. The upper limit of the number is set to 8, for example. In addition, from the start of power supply until the first probability change state designation command is received, and after receiving the short time state designation command or normal state designation command, that is, in the normal state (including the short time state), The upper limit is set to 4, for example. Accordingly, in the normal state, for example, the determinations of steps S854, S860, and S863 shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, the probability that the stop symbol is a winning symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is higher than the normal state, and one or both of the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball device 15 are normal. In the gaming state that is higher than the state (that is, the probability variation state in this embodiment), the upper limit value of the total pending storage number is increased. The upper limit value of the total number of pending storages may be increased in such a state. Further, control is performed so that only a state in which one or both of the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is higher than the normal state is generated, and in such a state, the upper limit of the total number of pending storages The value may be increased. Further, other game states that are advantageous to the player (for example, a state where the time-short state, the time-short state, and the normal symbol display 10 have a higher probability that the stop symbol is a hit symbol than the normal state, In such a state that one or both of the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is higher than the normal state). You may make it increase.

  Even when control is performed to change the upper limit value of the total reserved memory number, the first reserved memory number corresponding to the effective start winning number for the first start winning port 13 and the effective start winning number for the second starting winning port 14 The upper limit value of the second reserved storage number corresponding to is 4 respectively. However, when the upper limit value of the total number of reserved memories is 4, that is, when the probability variation state is not established, there is a low possibility that a game ball will win the second start winning opening 14 (the second reserved memory number does not increase so much). Therefore, even if the upper limit value of the total pending storage number is 4, the total pending storage number substantially matches the first pending storage number. However, the second reserved memory number may be 1 or more. In this case, the variable display of the background symbol corresponding to the second reserved memory is provided on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. Execute. However, when the total (true total) of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number exceeds 4, the background symbol variable display is not executed.

  In the second embodiment, the hardware configuration of the main board 31 and other boards is the same as the hardware configuration in the first embodiment.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
In the above embodiment, the background symbol is a symbol (specifically, a number) and the variation of the symbol is shown as the display effect by the background symbol. However, the display effect by the background symbol is not limited to the variation of the symbol or character. For example, in the variable display device 9, a display effect with a background symbol may be realized by performing a display effect that the character moves.

  FIG. 85 and FIG. 86 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of display effects in which the character moves in the variable display device 9. 85 and 86 show an example in which three symbols on the left, middle, and right are variably displayed as the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, respectively.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the effect control CPU 101 controls the background symbol display unit 9c so that two characters such as fighting players are engaged in a fight (FIG. 85A). To (D)). Then, as a reach production, a display production is performed in which one player holds down the other player (see FIG. 86E). Furthermore, when a big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a decorative symbol, a display effect is made as if one player has defeated the other player for a predetermined time and won (see FIG. 86 (F)).

  In addition, when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a decorative symbol, a display effect may be performed as if the other player gave up (see FIG. 86 (G)), or whether one player won immediately. A display effect like this may be performed (see FIG. 86H).

  Even if such a display effect is performed, it is possible to realize a display effect with a background symbol corresponding to the variation of the decorative symbol.

  In the third embodiment, the hardware configuration of the main board 31 and other boards is the same as the hardware configuration in the first embodiment.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, by skipping the jackpot determination (see step S65 in FIG. 31), the variable display of the second special symbol in which the display result is the jackpot symbol on the second special symbol display 8b. When it is being executed, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is controlled so as not to be a jackpot symbol, but the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a The means for preventing the display result from being a big hit symbol is not limited to such. For example, the CPU 56 always determines whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the second big hit flag is set, and the second special symbol is a big hit variation (a variation in which the stop symbol is a big hit symbol). When the determination is in the middle, if the determination result is a big hit, the determination result may be changed to an outlier. Further, when the second jackpot flag is set and the second special symbol is changing, the CPU 56 determines the value of the jackpot determination random number stored in the random number buffer before executing the jackpot determination process. The value may be changed to a value corresponding to the deviation.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the time reduction state is configured to be transferred only after the end of the probability variation state, but is not limited to such a configuration. (Time-shortening symbol) may be determined, and it may be configured to be controlled to the time-shortening state after the big hit symbol that becomes the time-shortening state and the big hit symbol. Also, all of the jackpot symbols may be time-shortened symbols (that is, all symbols “1”, “2”, “5”, “7”, “9” are time-shortened symbols). Further, the probability variation symbol and the time-short symbol may be distinguished or overlapped. When the probability variation symbol and the short time symbol overlap, if such a symbol is a big hit, the probability variation state and the short time state are controlled.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the time when the probability variation flag or the hourly flag is set and the time when the probability variation flag or the hourly flag is reset are when the special symbol stop symbol is derived and displayed or when the big hit game ends. However, the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag may be set / reset at the start of the variation of the special symbol. When the transition condition to the special game state (probability change state or short time state) is satisfied, when the change of the special symbol is not started, the probability change flag or the short time flag is not set / reset (for example, the special symbol variable display ends) In the case of setting / resetting the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag after that, there is a possibility that the profit given to the player will be different. For example, the start of the variation of the second special symbol immediately after the start of the variation of the first special symbol (variable display) in which the termination condition of the probability variation state or the termination condition of the time shortening state is satisfied in the probability variation state or the time shortening state When the condition is satisfied, when the variation of the special symbol is completed and the probability variation flag or the hourly flag is reset, when the variation of the second special symbol is started, the gaming state is the probability variation state or It is a short-time state, and the variation time becomes a time that can be selected in the probability variation state or the short-time state (the probability variation state is particularly when different from the variation time that can be selected in the normal state). On the other hand, if the start condition for the variation of the second special symbol is not satisfied from the start of the variation of the first special symbol to the end of the variation, the variation of the second special symbol is not started in the probability variation state or the short time state. That is, the number of fluctuations in the probability variation state or the short-time state differs depending on whether the second special symbol variation start condition is satisfied or not (particularly, the number of possible fluctuations in the probability variation state or the short-time state is set). If you have). However, such a difference does not occur if the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is reset when the variation of the special symbol is started.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the second big hit game is executed based on the fact that the first decorative symbol and the first special symbol are changing and the stop symbol of the second special symbol is the big hit symbol. When the medium is in the middle, the first interruption designating command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100, and the measurement of the variation time of the first decorative pattern is interrupted. The measurement of the fluctuation time may be interrupted. For example, when it is decided to end the probability variation state by so-called punk lottery (the lottery in the case where the probability variation state is configured to determine whether or not to terminate the probability variation state). In order to notify the player, a first interruption designation command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 to interrupt the measurement of the variation time of the first decorative symbol.

  Further, the first variable display executing means is a measuring means for measuring variable display time during which variable display of identification information is executed in the first variable display section, and a specific display result is derived and displayed in the second variable display section. Measurement interrupting means for interrupting the measurement of the measuring means at the time, the variable display in the first variable display unit can be continued until the specific display result is derived and displayed in the second variable display unit, The variable display in the first variable display unit is earlier than when the variable display in the first variable display unit is interrupted when it is determined that the specific display result is derived and displayed on the two variable display units. Can be terminated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by prolonging the time until the end of the variable display.

Embodiment 4 FIG.
FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command in the fourth embodiment. In the effect control command shown in FIG. 28, the change pattern commands (8000 (H) to 80034 (H)) are effect control commands that specify only the change time. However, in the effect control command shown in FIG. The commands (8000 (H) to 8034 (H)) not only specify the variation time, but also specify whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit. That is, among the variation patterns, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is divided into a variation pattern command with execution of the re-lottery effect after completion of the big hit and a variation pattern command without execution of the re-lottery effect.

  Correspondingly, for the variation pattern table, the variation pattern table at the time of the big hit is set with a variation pattern table in which a variation pattern designating non-execution of the re-lottery effect and a variation pattern designating execution of the re-lottery effect are set. Divided into a variation pattern table.

  In addition, in the effect control command shown in FIG. 28, as the symbol / effect designation command, the miss designation command (9004 (H)), the normal jackpot designation command (9003 (H)), and the short and long jackpot designation command (9001 (H)) , Probabilistic big hit designation command (9000 (H)), Probable change short and big hit designation command (9002 (H)), Normal big hit designation command with re-lottery (9006 (H)), Short and large big hit designation command with re-lottery (9007 (H)) ), There are nine probable change jackpot designation commands with re-lottery (9008 (H)) and probable change short and large jackpot designation commands with re-lottery (9009 (H)). However, in the production control command shown in FIG. As a production designation command, a miss designation command (9004 (H)), a normal jackpot designation command (9003 (H)), Short jackpot designation command (9001 (H)), probability variation big hit designation command (9000 (H)), probability variation time reduction jackpot designation command (9002 (H)) not five provided only for.

  In the first embodiment, the execution of the re-lottery effect is specified by the symbol / effect designating command. However, in the fourth embodiment, the execution of the re-lottery effect is specified by the variation pattern command. become.

  Processing for transmitting the above command will be described. 88 and 89 are flowcharts showing an example of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process in the fourth embodiment. The second special symbol stop symbol setting process has the same contents as those shown in FIGS. 88 and 89.

  The first special symbol stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 88 and FIG. 89 is different from the first special symbol stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 32 and FIG. 33 with re-lottery in steps S1109, S1115, S1121, and S1128. The point is that control for sending the jackpot designation command is not executed. Other processes are the same as the first special symbol stop symbol setting process shown in FIGS. 32 and 33.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S302) in the first special symbol process process according to the fourth embodiment. The second variation pattern setting process is the same as that shown in FIG.

  The first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 90 differs from the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 34 in step S202a in FIG. 34 in which the variation pattern is changed according to the state data and the first big hit flag set state. Although the table has been selected, in step S202A in FIG. 90, the variation pattern table is selected by recognizing not only the state data and the first big hit flag set state, but also the re-lottery execution flag set state. That is, in step S202A of FIG. 90, the gaming state is recognized based on the state data, whether the big hit is recognized based on the first big hit flag, and when it is recognized that the big hit is determined, the re-lottery execution flag is set. Based on the recognition of whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed after the end of the big hit game, the variation pattern table is selected.

  For example, when the state data recognizes that the gaming state is the normal gaming state, recognizes that the first big hit flag is a big hit, and further recognizes that the re-lottery effect will be executed after the big lottery game is ended by the re-lottery execution flag Then, the variation pattern table in the case of the re-drawing execution at the time of the big hit for the normal gaming state is selected. Then, using this variation pattern table, a variation pattern designating execution of the re-lottery effect is determined (step S212), and the determined variation pattern command is transmitted to the effect control board 80 (step S213).

  Next, the analysis process of the effect control command will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 48 in the first embodiment. In FIG. 47 in the first embodiment, the processes in steps S1630 to S1642 are not executed. This is because the jackpot designation command with the re-lottery is not transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 as described above.

  In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 91, if the received effect control command is an effect control command (change pattern command: 8000 (H) to 8034 (H)) for specifying a change pattern (step S1648), the effect control micro is set. The computer 100 stores the EXT data of the command in the fluctuation pattern data storage area in the RAM (step S1649) and sets the fluctuation pattern reception flag (step S1650). Next, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not execution of the re-lottery production is designated by the variation pattern command (step S1670). When execution of the re-lottery effect is designated, a re-lottery execution flag is set after the big hit (step S1671). If execution of the re-lottery effect is not designated, a re-lottery non-execution flag is set after the big hit is over (step S1672). Thereafter, the processes of steps S1651 to S1665 are executed. Note that the processing in steps 1S651 to S1665 is the same as the processing shown in FIG.

  Note that configurations other than those shown above are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  Even in such a configuration, as in the first embodiment, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the player does not know when the re-lottery effect is executed, and the re-lottery effect is performed a plurality of times (twice). ) Since there is a possibility of being executed, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the transition to the probable state for a long period of time. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unnatural situation such that a re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit game is executed despite the occurrence of a probable big hit in the re-lottery effect before the start of the big hit game. it can. In addition, there is no possibility of erroneously displaying a big hit symbol during the big hit game. Further, since the variation pattern command is a command that can specify whether to execute not only the variation time but also the re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit game, the game control microcomputer and the effect control microcomputer 100 can transmit and receive commands. The control burden involved can be reduced.

Embodiment 5 FIG.
FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command in the fifth embodiment. In the effect control command shown in FIG. 28, the change pattern commands (8000 (H) to 8034 (H)) are effect control commands that specify only the change time. However, in the effect control command shown in FIG. The commands (8000 (H) to 8034 (H)) specify not only the fluctuation time but also the big hit type (normal big hit, short-time big hit or probability variable big hit, etc.). That is, among the variation patterns, the variation pattern at the time of big hit is divided into a variation pattern command at the time of normal big hit, a variation pattern command at the time of short-term big hit, a variation pattern command at the probability variation big hit, and a variation pattern command at the time of probability big hit.

  Correspondingly, for the variation pattern table, the variation pattern table for the big hit is usually the variation pattern table for which the variation pattern for the big hit is set, the variation pattern table for which the variation pattern for the short and long-term hit is set, The variation pattern table in which the variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern table in which the variation pattern at the time of probability change is set.

  In addition, in the effect control command shown in FIG. 28, as the symbol / effect designation command, the miss designation command (9004 (H)), the normal jackpot designation command (9003 (H)), and the short and long jackpot designation command (9001 (H)) , Probabilistic big hit designation command (9000 (H)), Probable change short and big hit designation command (9002 (H)), Normal big hit designation command with re-lottery (9006 (H)), Short and large big hit designation command with re-lottery (9007 (H)) ), Nine commands of a probability change jackpot designation command with re-lottery (9008 (H)) and a probability change time big hit designation command with re-lottery (9009 (H)) are provided, but in the effect control command shown in FIG. As a production designation command, a miss designation command (9004 (H)), a no-lottery designation command (9000 (H); large Not only three provided jackpot after completion specified execution of redrawing effect of); Ri specified non-execution of re-drawing effect after termination), redrawing Specified command (9001 (H).

  In the first embodiment, the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect and the jackpot type are specified by the symbol / effect designation command. In the fifth embodiment, the jackpot type is specified by the variation pattern command. become.

  Next, processing for transmitting the above command will be described. 93 and 94 are flowcharts showing an example of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process in the fifth embodiment. The second special symbol stop symbol setting process has the same contents as those shown in FIGS. 93 and 94.

  The first special symbol stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 93 and FIG. 94 differs from the first special symbol stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 32 and FIG. , S1120, S1127), instead of a re-lottery designation command (steps S1108A, S1114A, S1120A, S1127A), and a process of transmitting a jackpot designation command with a re-lottery (steps S1109, S1115, S1121, S1128) ), And a designation command with re-lottery is transmitted (steps S1109A, S1115A, S1121A, S1128A). Other processes are the same as the first special symbol stop symbol setting process shown in FIGS. 32 and 33.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S302) in the first special symbol process process according to the fifth embodiment. The second variation pattern setting process is the same as that shown in FIG.

  The first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 95 differs from the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 34 in step S202a in FIG. 34 in which the variation pattern is changed according to the state data and the first big hit flag set state. Although the table has been selected, in step S202B in FIG. 95, not only the status data and the first big hit flag set state, but also the big hit flag (time and short big hit flag, probability variable big hit flag) set state is recognized and the fluctuation pattern table It is a point to select. That is, in step S202B in FIG. 95, the gaming state is recognized based on the state data, whether the big hit is recognized based on the first big hit flag, and when the big hit flag is recognized, the big hit flag is set. The variation pattern table is selected after recognizing the jackpot type based on the above.

  For example, if it is recognized from the state data that the gaming state is a normal gaming state, the first big hit flag is recognized as a big hit, and the big hit flag is recognized as a promising big hit, A variation pattern table in the case of a probable big hit is selected. Then, using this variation pattern table, a variation pattern that designates the probability variation big hit is determined (step S212), and the determined variation pattern command is transmitted to the effect control board 80 (step S213).

  Next, the effect control command analysis process will be described. 96 and 97 are flowcharts showing an example of command analysis processing in the fifth embodiment. 96 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 46 in the first embodiment, and FIG. 97 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 48 in the first embodiment. In FIG. 46 and FIG. 47 in the first embodiment, the processes of steps S1617 to S1642 are not executed. This is because, as described above, the game control microcomputer 560 does not transmit a symbol / effect designation command such as a normal jackpot designation or a short-time jackpot designation.

  In the command analysis processing shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, the processing in steps S1611 to S1616 is the same as the processing shown in FIG. If the received effect control command is an effect control command designated with re-lottery (designation command with re-lottery: 9001 (H)) (step S1680), a re-lottery execution flag is set after the big hit (step S1681). If the received effect control command is an effect control command for specifying no re-lottery (no re-lottery specifying command: 9000 (H)) (step S1682), a re-lottery non-execution flag is set after the big hit (step S1683). . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1643.

  Following the processing in step S1647, the following processing is performed. If the received effect control command is an effect control command for specifying a variation pattern (variation pattern command: 8000 (H) to 8034 (H)) (step S1648), the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the EXT data of the command. Are stored in the fluctuation pattern data storage area in the RAM (step S1649), and the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (step S1650). Next, if the variation pattern is the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the type of the big hit based on the variation pattern command (step S1690). Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a jackpot effect flag corresponding to the jackpot type (step S1691). For example, if it is a variation pattern command that normally specifies a big hit, the normal big hit effect flag is set, and if it is a variation pattern command that specifies a probability big hit short hit, the probability variable big hit effect flag is set, and Set the production flag. Thereafter, the processes of steps S1651 to S1665 are executed. Note that the processing in steps S1651 to S1665 is the same as the processing shown in FIG.

  Note that configurations other than those shown above are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  Even in such a configuration, as in the first embodiment, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the player does not know when the re-lottery effect is executed, and the re-lottery effect is performed a plurality of times (twice). ) Since there is a possibility of being executed, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the transition to the probable state for a long period of time. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unnatural situation such that a re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit game is executed despite the occurrence of a probable big hit in the re-lottery effect before the start of the big hit game. it can. In addition, there is no possibility of erroneously displaying a big hit symbol during the big hit game. Further, since the variation pattern command is a command that can specify whether to execute not only the variation time but also the re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit game, the game control microcomputer and the effect control microcomputer 100 can transmit and receive commands. The control burden involved can be reduced.

Embodiment 6 FIG.
FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command in the sixth embodiment. In the effect control command shown in FIG. 98, in addition to designating the display during the round according to the number of rounds in the special winning opening opening display commands (B10X (H), B11X (H)), the re-lottery during the round The execution / non-execution of the production is specified.

  In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether or not the re-lottery execution flag is set in the first big prize opening opening pre-processing (step S307), and next, based on the value of the round number counter. Check the number of rounds to start. When the re-lottery execution flag is set, the display during the round according to the number of rounds and the re-lottery during the round according to the contents of the table in which the presence / absence of execution of the re-lottery effect is predetermined for each round. Control is performed to transmit a display command during opening of the special winning opening that designates execution / non-execution of the performance. When the display control microcomputer 100 receives the display command during the opening of the special winning opening, the content of the command is analyzed by the command analysis processing, and the jackpot display processing (step S906) and after the round are performed according to the content of the command. In the process (step S908), an effect during round is selected. Then, a re-lottery effect is executed during a predetermined round in the round process (step S907). According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the re-lottery effect even during the round in addition to the start of the big hit game or when the ending effect is executed. Accordingly, the player becomes even less aware of when the re-lottery effect will be performed, and as a result, the player can always have a sense of expectation for the execution of the re-lottery effect (that is, the transition to the probable change state). .

  In the sixth embodiment, the re-lottery effect can be executed during the round. However, the re-lottery effect can be executed during the interval between rounds. May be. Specifically, in the display command after opening the big winning opening, not only the display during the interval according to the number of rounds but also the execution / non-execution of the re-lottery effect during the interval may be specified.

  Furthermore, execution / non-execution of the re-lottery effect may be designated in all of the display commands during the opening of the special winning opening, the display command after the opening of the special winning opening and the ending command, or any two of these commands may be designated. In this case, execution / non-execution of the re-lottery effect may be designated. According to such a configuration, the player is further unaware of when the re-lottery effect is performed, and the player can always have a sense of expectation for the execution of the re-lottery effect.

  In Embodiments 3 and 5, the design / effect designation command specifies whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed after the end of the big hit, and the ending command also specifies whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed after the end of the big win. It is specified. According to such a configuration, even if a garbled data or the like occurs in the symbol / effect designating command and the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100 are not matched in control, the ending command Thus, the correct designation as to whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect after the end of the big hit can be performed again. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the ending effect based on the ending command, so that the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100 are restored from the inconsistent control state. be able to. It is also possible to prevent the re-drawing effect from being interrupted as much as possible by sending a variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560 during execution of the re-drawing effect after the big hit.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, the big hit type using a random number for determining the big hit type (not only determination of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, but also execution of a re-lottery effect) Including the presence or absence). However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and it may be configured to determine whether to determine a normal big hit or a probable big hit and to determine whether to execute the re-lottery effect using different random numbers.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, even if it is determined that the normal big hit is made, there are cases where the re-lottery effect after the big hit game is executed or not executed, but it is determined that the normal big hit is made. In such a case, the re-lottery effect after the big hit game may not always be executed (or executed). In this case, it is not necessary to distinguish between the case where the re-lottery effect is executed and the case where it is not executed in the effect control command for designating the normal jackpot. Similarly, when it is determined that the time-hit big hit is made, the re-lottery effect after the big hit game may not always be executed (or executed).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, whether or not to execute a re-lottery effect is specified in the symbol / effect designation command (or variation pattern command), and the re-lottery effect is also specified in the ending command (or the big prize opening display command). Whether to execute was specified. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the execution / non-execution of the re-lottery effect may be specified only by the symbol / effect designation command (or the variation pattern command). In this case, if the execution of the re-lottery effect is designated by the symbol / effect designating command or the like, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the re-lottery effect based on the ending command (or the big prize opening display command). Will do. Accordingly, in such a configuration, the ending command (or the special winning opening release display command) serves as a command indicating the execution timing of the re-lottery effect.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the time reduction state is controlled to continue for a predetermined number of times (100 times) after the end of the big hit, but the probability variation state also has a predetermined number of times (100 times) after the end of the big hit. ) May continue to be continued. In addition, the transition conditions and end conditions of each game state such as the normal game state, the short time state, and the probability change state are not limited to the conditions shown in the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, when a normal big hit is made in the probability change state, the control is made so as to shift to the normal game state, but the control may be made so as to shift to the time reduction state.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, each effect means (variable display device 9, speaker 27 and lamps 25, 28a, 28b, 28c) is controlled using one effect control means (effect control microcomputer 100). Although the case where it does is demonstrated, the gaming machine may be provided with a plurality of effect control means. For example, the gaming machine includes a sound / lamp control board equipped with a sound / lamp control microcomputer for controlling the speaker 27 and the lamps 25, 28 a, 28 b, 28 c, and a symbol control microcomputer for controlling the variable display device 9. A mounted symbol control board may be provided. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits presentation control commands such as a variation pattern command and a display result designation command to the sound / lamp control microcomputer, and the symbol control microcomputer is a sound / lamp control microcomputer. Based on the effect control command transferred from, a game effect including a re-lottery effect may be performed using the variable display device 9.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine of the above embodiment can be given a predetermined game value to a player mainly when the stop symbol of the special symbol variably displayed on the variable display unit based on the start winning becomes the predetermined symbol. A pachinko machine that can be given a predetermined gaming value to a player when there is a prize in a predetermined area of an electric game that is released based on a start prize, or a start prize The present invention can be applied even to a pachinko gaming machine in which a predetermined right is generated or continued when a winning is given to a predetermined electric combination that is released when a stop symbol of a variably displayed symbol becomes a predetermined symbol combination . Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine that inserts game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game, or a game machine that inserts game balls instead of game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game.

  The present invention is applicable to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and particularly includes two variable display units and one notification symbol display unit, and is executed by any one of the variable display units in the notification symbol display unit. The present invention can be suitably applied to a gaming machine configured to notify the player of the progress of the variable display.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between the random number for jackpot determination, and a jackpot determination value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display method of a symbol reservation memory | storage display part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the kind of variation pattern (variation time) of a background symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically an example of the relationship between the variable display of a special symbol and a decoration symbol, and the variable display of a background symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically an example of the relationship between the variable display of a special symbol and a decoration symbol, and the variable display of a background symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically an example of the relationship between the variable display of a special symbol and a decoration symbol, and the variable display of a background symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically an example of the relationship between the variable display of a special symbol and a decoration symbol, and the variable display of a background symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically an example of the relationship between the variable display of a special symbol and a decoration symbol, and the variable display of a background symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically an example of the relationship between the variable display of a special symbol and a decoration symbol, and the variable display of a background symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a switching point and the total number of pending storage. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a switching point and the total number of pending storage. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a switching point and the total number of pending storage. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a switching point and the total number of pending storage. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a switching point and the total number of pending storage. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between the stop symbol of a special symbol, and the game state controlled after that. It is a flowchart which shows pending storage processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol process process. FIG. 38E illustrates an effect control command signal line. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between an 8-bit control signal and an INT signal that constitute an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st start port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st deviation symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st big hit symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st grand prize opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st big winning opening opening process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st big winning opening opening process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of state data. It is a timing diagram showing the transmission timing of the effect control command when the 15-round jackpot game is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st design process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st decoration design change process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st decoration design change process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st decoration design change process. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding memory | storage display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change start process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change (first half) process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change (first half) process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change (first half) process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the fluctuation | variation of the background symbol by a background symbol variation start process and a background symbol variation (first half) process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the fluctuation | variation of the background symbol by a background symbol variation start process and a background symbol variation (first half) process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the fluctuation | variation of the background symbol by a background symbol variation start process and a background symbol variation (first half) process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the fluctuation | variation of the background symbol by a background symbol variation start process and a background symbol variation (first half) process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change (second half) process. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol change (second half) process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the fluctuation | variation of the background symbol by the background symbol variation (second half) process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the fluctuation | variation of the background symbol by the background symbol variation (second half) process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the fluctuation | variation of the background symbol by the background symbol variation (second half) process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the variable display of the background symbol in a background symbol display part. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the variable display of the background symbol in a background symbol display part. It is a flowchart which shows a background symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows a round post-process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the re-lottery effect of the big hit symbol performed in a variable display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the re-lottery effect of the big hit symbol performed in a variable display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the re-lottery effect of the jackpot symbol in the case of demoting a probability variation symbol to a non-probability variation symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the re-lottery effect of the jackpot symbol in the case of demoting a probability variation symbol to a non-probability variation symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the symbol reservation memory | storage display part when the upper limit of the total number of reservation memory | storage is changed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display effect which a character moves. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display effect which a character moves. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of content of an effect control command in the fourth embodiment. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of first special symbol stop symbol setting processing in the fourth embodiment. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of first special symbol stop symbol setting processing in the fourth embodiment. 14 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process in the fourth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating command analysis processing according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of an effect control command in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop symbol setting process in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop symbol setting process in the fifth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process in the fifth embodiment. 18 is a flowchart illustrating command analysis processing in the fifth embodiment. 18 is a flowchart illustrating command analysis processing in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of content of an effect control command in the sixth embodiment.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Variable display device 9a 1st variable display part 9b 2nd variable display part 9c Background symbol display part 13 1st starting winning a prize 14 2nd starting winning a prize Mouth 15 Variable winning ball device 18c Symbol hold memory display unit 31 Main board 56 CPU
80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (9)

A first variable display unit that starts variable display of the first identification information based on the satisfaction of the first start condition of variable display after the first execution condition of variable display is satisfied; A second variable display unit for starting the variable display of the second identification information based on the satisfaction of the second start condition of the variable display after the second execution condition of the variable display is satisfied, and for deriving and displaying the display result; And when a specific display result is derived and displayed on one of the first variable display unit and the second variable display unit, the player shifts to a specific game state advantageous to the player, and a predetermined transfer condition is satisfied. A gaming machine that shifts to a special gaming state in which the display result of the variable display of identification information is more likely to be the specific display result than when the normal gaming state is sometimes different from the specific gaming state,
A third variable display unit that makes it easier to visually recognize display contents than the first variable display unit and the second variable display unit;
State data indicating whether or not the gaming state is the special gaming state is set to special state data indicating that the special gaming state is in effect when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and the predetermined end condition is satisfied State data setting means for setting non-special state data indicating that the game is not in a special gaming state when
Whether or not to make the display result of the variable display of the first identification information the specific display result when starting the variable display of the first identification information of the first variable display unit based on the establishment of the first start condition First predetermining means for determining whether or not to establish the predetermined transition condition;
Whether or not to make the display result of the variable display of the second identification information the specific display result when starting the variable display of the second identification information of the second variable display unit based on the establishment of the second start condition And a second pre-determining means for determining whether or not to satisfy the predetermined transition condition;
First variable display time determining means for determining a variable display time of the first identification information of the first variable display unit;
Second variable display time determining means for determining a variable display time of the second identification information of the second variable display unit;
Based on the determination result of the first predetermining means, variable display of the first identification information is executed by the first variable display section, and the variable display time determined by the first variable display time determining means has elapsed. A first variable display executing means for deriving and displaying a display result on the first variable display section,
Based on the determination result of the second predetermining means, variable display of the second identification information is executed by the second variable display section, and the variable display time determined by the second variable display time determining means has elapsed. A second variable display executing means for sometimes deriving and displaying a display result on the second variable display section;
When the variable display of the first identification information is executed on the first variable display unit by the first variable display execution unit, and the second identification is performed on the second variable display unit by the second variable display execution unit. When the variable display of information is executed, the variable display of the third identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, and the first is displayed when a predetermined variable display time has elapsed. Third variable display execution means for deriving and displaying an effect result corresponding to a display result of variable display of identification information or second identification information on the third variable display unit;
Total establishment number display means for displaying the total establishment number that is the sum of the establishment number of the first execution condition and the establishment number of the second execution condition in an identifiable manner;
A total number-of-established number updating means for subtracting and updating a display capable of specifying the total number of established times when the third variable display executing means executes variable display of the third identification information;
A total establishment number determination means for determining whether or not the total establishment number is a predetermined value or more,
The third variable display execution means starts the variable display of the third identification information after the total establishment number determination means determines that the total establishment number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The variable display time until the presentation result corresponding to the display result of the variable display of the second identification information is derived and displayed on the third variable display unit is less than the predetermined value by the total number determination unit. Including a variable display time shortening means for shortening than when it is determined that
When the state data setting means is shifted to the special gaming state, the state data setting means includes first identification information based on the variable display time determined by the first variable display time determination means or the second variable display time determination means, or When the variable display of the second identification information is started, it is determined whether or not the predetermined end condition is satisfied, and when it is determined that the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the state data is changed to non-special state data. A gaming machine characterized by setting. A game control microcomputer for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect control microcomputer for controlling the display state of the third variable display section,
The first pre-determining means determines whether or not to execute a post-transition notification effect for informing whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied at a predetermined timing after transition to the specific gaming state before the display result is derived and displayed. And
The second pre-determining means determines whether or not to execute a post-transition notification effect for informing whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied at a predetermined timing after transition to the specific gaming state before the display result is derived and displayed. And
The game control microcomputer
Based on the determination result by the first predetermination means or the second predetermination means, it is possible to specify the variable display time from the start of the variable display of the identification information in the plurality of variable display sections until the display result is derived and displayed Variable display data selection means for selecting variable display data from a plurality of predetermined variable display data;
Variable display command transmission means for transmitting a variable display command indicating the variable display data selected by the variable display data selection means;
Based on the determination result by the first pre-determining means or the second pre-deciding means, whether or not to obtain a specific display result, whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and whether or not to execute the post-transition notification effect Display result command transmission means for transmitting a display result command indicating heel;
A notification effect start command transmitting means for transmitting a notification effect start command indicating the start of execution of the post-transfer notification effect at a predetermined timing after the transition to the specific gaming state;
The production control microcomputer is:
Among a plurality of types of variable display modes including a variable display mode for executing a pre-transition notification effect for informing whether or not the predetermined transition condition is satisfied before the start of the specific gaming state based on the variable display command. From the variable display mode selection means for selecting the variable display mode to be executed,
A post-transition notification effect executing means for executing the post-transition notification effect in the third variable display unit based on the notification effect start command;
When the variable display mode for executing the notification effect before transition is selected by the variable display mode selection means, and the display result command from the display result command transmission means indicates execution of the notification effect after transition And notification prohibition control means for controlling not to notify that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the notification effect before transition,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the third variable display executing means executes variable display of the third identification information in the third variable display section based on the variable display mode selected by the variable display mode selecting means. . A game control microcomputer for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect control microcomputer for controlling the display state of the third variable display section,
The first pre-determining means determines whether or not to execute a post-transition notification effect for informing whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied at a predetermined timing after transition to the specific gaming state before the display result is derived and displayed. And
The second pre-determining means determines whether or not to execute a post-transition notification effect for informing whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied at a predetermined timing after transition to the specific gaming state before the display result is derived and displayed. And
The game control microcomputer
Based on the determination result by the first prior determination means or the second prior determination means, the variable display time from the start of variable display of identification information in a plurality of variable display sections until the display result is derived and displayed, and the transition Variable display data selection means for selecting variable display data capable of specifying whether or not to execute the post-notification effect from a plurality of predetermined variable display data;
Variable display command transmission means for transmitting a variable display command indicating the variable display data selected by the variable display data selection means;
A display result command for transmitting a display result command indicating whether or not to make a specific display result and whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied based on a determination result by the first pre-deciding means or the second pre-deciding means. A transmission means;
A notification effect start command transmitting means for transmitting a notification effect start command indicating the start of execution of the post-transfer notification effect at a predetermined timing after the transition to the specific gaming state;
The production control microcomputer is:
Among a plurality of types of variable display modes including a variable display mode for executing a pre-transition notification effect for informing whether or not the predetermined transition condition is satisfied before starting the specific gaming state based on the variable display command. From the variable display mode selection means for selecting the variable display mode to be executed,
A post-transition notification effect executing means for executing the post-transition notification effect in the third variable display unit based on the notification effect start command;
When the variable display mode for executing the notification effect before transition is selected by the variable display mode selection means, and the variable display command from the variable display command transmission means indicates the execution of the notification effect after transition. And notification prohibition control means for controlling not to notify that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the notification effect before transition,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the third variable display executing means executes variable display of the third identification information in the third variable display section based on the variable display mode selected by the variable display mode selecting unit. A game control microcomputer for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect control microcomputer for controlling the display state of the third variable display section,
The first pre-determining means determines whether or not to execute a post-transition notification effect for informing whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied at a predetermined timing after transition to the specific gaming state before the display result is derived and displayed. And
The second pre-determining means determines whether or not to execute a post-transition notification effect for informing whether or not a predetermined transition condition is satisfied at a predetermined timing after transition to the specific gaming state before the display result is derived and displayed. And
The game control microcomputer
Based on the determination result by the first pre-determining means or the second pre-deciding means, a variable display time from starting variable display of identification information in a plurality of variable display sections to deriving and displaying a display result and a predetermined display Variable display data selection means for selecting variable display data capable of specifying whether or not to establish the transition condition from a plurality of predetermined variable display data;
Variable display command transmission means for transmitting a variable display command indicating the variable display data selected by the variable display data selection means;
Display result command transmission for transmitting a display result command indicating whether to execute the post-transition notification effect and whether to make a specific display result based on the determination result by the first prior determination unit or the second prior determination unit Means,
A notification effect start command transmitting means for transmitting a notification effect start command indicating the start of execution of the post-transfer notification effect at a predetermined timing after the transition to the specific gaming state;
The production control microcomputer is:
Among a plurality of types of variable display modes including a variable display mode for executing a pre-transition notification effect for informing whether or not the predetermined transition condition is satisfied before the start of the specific gaming state based on the variable display command. From the variable display mode selection means for selecting the variable display mode to be executed,
A post-transition notification effect executing means for executing the post-transition notification effect in the third variable display unit based on the notification effect start command;
Notification prohibition control for controlling not to notify that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the notification effect before transition when the variable display mode for executing the notification effect before transition is selected by the variable display mode selection means. Means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the third variable display executing means executes variable display of the third identification information in the third variable display section based on the variable display mode selected by the variable display mode selecting means. .   The gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4, wherein the notification effect start command transmitting means transmits the notification effect start command after the specific gaming state is ended. When the game control microcomputer determines by the first predetermining means or the second predetermining means not to execute the post-transition notification effect, the specific game indicating the end of the specific game state different from the notification effect start command A specific game state end command transmission means for transmitting a specific game state end command indicating execution of the state end effect,
6. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein the effect control microcomputer includes a specific game state end effect executing means for executing the specific game state end effect in a third variable display unit based on the specific game state end command.   The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein the execution time of the specific game state end effect executed by the specific game state end effect executing means is shorter than the execution time of the post-transfer notification effect executed by the post-transfer notification effect executing means. The first pre-determining unit is configured so that the second pre-determining unit determines that the display result of the variable display of the second identification information is the specific display result. After the display result of the variable display is determined to be the specific display result, the display result of the variable display of the first identification information is displayed for a specific period until the display result is derived and displayed by the second variable display execution means. Decided not to have specific display results,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7, further comprising prohibiting means for prohibiting establishment of the first start condition in the specific gaming state. Pattern table storage means for storing a variable display pattern table showing variable display patterns of a plurality of types of identification information;
First variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern of the first identification information based on the variable display pattern table stored in the pattern table storage means;
A second variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern of the second identification information based on the variable display pattern table stored in the pattern table storage means;
When the pattern table storage means is determined not to change the display result of the variable display of the first identification information to the specific display result during the specific period by the first pre-determining means in the variable display pattern table. And storing a specific period pattern table for determining a variable display pattern by the first variable display pattern determining means,
When the first variable display pattern determining unit determines that the display result of the variable display of the first identification information is not to be the specific display result during the specific period by the first pre-determining unit, the pattern table storage Determining a variable display pattern of the first identification information based on a specific period pattern table stored by the means;
The gaming machine according to claim 8, wherein the first variable display executing means executes variable display of the first identification information according to a variable display pattern determined by the first variable display pattern determining means.

Images